JP2018153335A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine, when having a plurality of count values, updating the respective count values by a simple method.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: "F021" that stores a count value for determining whether or not an external signal output time elapses; and "F022" that stores a count value for determining whether or not a reel stop reception standby time elapses. The "F021" and "F022" are continuously disposed. When it becomes timing for updating a count value, a) the game machine stores the "F021" in an HL register, b) subtracts "1" from a count value of the "F021" on the basis of the value of the HL register, c) adds "1" to an HL register value to update the HL register value to the "F022", and d) subtracts "1" from the count value of the "F022" on the basis of the value of the HL register so as to update count values of the "F021" and "F022" for each time of becoming the timing for updating the count value.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 31

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine which updates a count value for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the conventional gaming machine, when it is decided to execute the effect, the delay time lottery is performed, the delay time obtained by this lottery is measured by the subtraction timer, and after the delay time has elapsed, the effect execution circuit is signaled. Is known, and a technique for starting an effect is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-052133

In the above-described conventional gaming machine, for example, when there are a plurality of measurement targets (when updating a plurality of timer values), the program may be complicated and the program capacity may increase.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to update each count value with a simple program in the case where there are a plurality of count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.

The invention solves the above-mentioned problems by means of the following solutions (in parentheses, the structure of the corresponding embodiment is shown). The invention according to the first claim of the present application corresponds to the first invention 3 among the first inventions 1 to 8 described later.
The original invention is
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S742 in FIG. 58), a count value for storing whether or not a first time (external signal output time) has elapsed is stored. 1 storage area (F021 (H)),
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S 326 in FIG. 51), the count value for determining whether the second time (reel stop acceptance standby time) has elapsed is stored. And a second storage area (F022 (H)),
Sequentially arranging the address of the first storage area and the address of the second storage area;
When it is time to update the count value
a) A value (F021 (H)) for specifying the address value of the first storage area is stored in the register (HL register) (step S631 in FIG. 55),
b) Subtract “1” from the count value of the first storage area based on the value of the register (step S633).
c) The address of the second storage area is specified by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the value of the register (in the first embodiment, however, for example, subtracting in the second embodiment C). Update to the value you want (step S634),
d) Subtract "1" from the count value of the second storage area based on the value of the register (step S633)
Thus, the count values of the first storage area and the second storage area can be updated whenever it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to continue updating a plurality of types of storage areas only by executing register update processing and count value subtraction processing.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure which shows various LED on a display substrate. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the input ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 0-3 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 4-7 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows some data (input port 0 level data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (input port 1 level data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (The input port 1 fall data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (a specific information flag etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (a medal management flag etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the data (operating state flag etc.) of a part of storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (automatic bet number data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (interrupt counter etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (a prize and a replay condition apparatus information etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (blocker and hopper motor drive signal data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the timer value (external signal output time etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a flow chart which shows program start processing (M_PRG_START). It is a flowchart which shows a power supply reset process (M_POWER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows main processing (M_MAIN) processing. 51 is a flowchart showing a game start set (MS_GAME_SET) process. It is a flowchart which shows control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET). It is a flow chart which shows medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). It is a flowchart which shows 2-byte time waiting processing (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows interruption waiting (C_INTR_WAIT). It is a flowchart which shows blocker on (MS_BLOCKER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows medal insertion waiting (MS_STANDBY_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows a medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows blocker off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF). It is a flow chart which shows settlement processing (M_MEDAL_RET). It is a flowchart which shows one medal payout processing (M_1 MEDAL_PAY). It is a flowchart following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a start switch check (M_START_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows start switch reception (MS_START_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows reel rotation start preparation (M_REEL_READY). It is a flowchart which shows reel stop control (M_REEL_STOP). It is a flow chart which shows medal payout by winning (MS_WIN_PAY). It is a flowchart which shows game end check processing (M_GAME_CHK). It is a flow chart which shows interrupt processing (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT). It is a flowchart which shows a passage sensor check (PATHSEN_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT). It is a flow chart which shows condition device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT). It is a figure explaining the example of an output of conditional device information. It is a figure which shows the address arrangement | positioning of the timer value of 2nd Embodiment (AC), and is a figure corresponding to FIG. 31 of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement (example 1) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment A, and a reference | standard address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement (example 2) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment A, and a reference | standard address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment B, and a reference | standard address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement (example 1) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment C, and a reference | standard address. It is a flowchart which shows the timer measurement (example 2) in the address arrangement | positioning of 2nd Embodiment C, and a reference | standard address.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (1BB, replay, small part) to be drawn and its winning probability is unique, and "RT transition" means one of By shifting from one RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be selected for lottery changes. Therefore, the winning probability for each replay type in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and the winning probability for each replay type will be the same for one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, there is no problem that the sum of winning probability of replay becomes the same between one RT and the other RT.

In the present embodiment, the RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 and RT4 (FIGS. 14 and 15 described later).
Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, and is equivalent to “RT0”. Thus, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-internal part is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3 and the internal part is RT4. The types (numbers) of replays to be drawn by lottery and the winning probability thereof differ between inside and outside.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RTs during special game. In this embodiment, each of the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation performs at least one replay lottery.
The "combination" is a target of a lottery, and in the present embodiment, the condition device is drawn, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when any condition device is won, at least one winning combination will be won (with at least one winning combination).

The condition device to be drawn has “subject condition device” that includes any of “special roles (roles)”, and “winning and replay condition device” that includes any of small part or replay. .
The item condition device includes any one of the special roles. When special roles are won, devices (SB (single bonus), RB (type 1 special role; regular bonus), CB (type 2 special role; challenge bonus), etc. that are devices for facilitating the winning of small roles, 1BB (type 1 continuous action device; type 1 big bonus), 2BB (second type continuous action device; type 2 big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-class product continuous operation device (1BB) refers to a device capable of operating the first-class special service (RB) continuously.
Similarly, a second-class continuous acting device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating a second-class special role (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
Further, in the present embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small winning combination or replay that does not carry over the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the "item condition device" includes any of RB, 1BB and 2BB which can carry over the winning information after the next game and SB and CB which do not carry over the winning information after the next game. In the present embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) capable of carrying the winning information after the next game is provided.

When winning a prize condition device that includes any of the special parts that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the special prize winning information until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special part is stopped on the effective line Carry over to the next game.
Then, a game in which the winning condition information device including a special part that can carry over after the next game is not won is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the combination condition symbol device is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination won is not yet stopped on the effective line, that is, "inside" the game carrying over the special combination winning information It is said. In the present embodiment, although the game winning the item condition device is included in “non-internal”, the game winning the item condition device may be included in “internal”.

  The “preferred operation mode” of the stop switch is an operation mode in which the player with a large number of payouts wins in a game where advantage / convenience occurs in the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the effective line) by the operation mode of the stop switch. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a player who does not shift (promotion) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT wins. The "favorable operation mode" is also referred to as the correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept that indicates the pressing order of the stop switch and / or the operation timing (the timing at which the target symbol is pressed by the stop switch to stop on the effective line).
And, in the present embodiment, “a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” is a game when a push order bell (small group B, small group C group) is won, double replay (replay B group, replay C group ) It corresponds to the game when winning.

Furthermore, the bell (small part) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct order in the correct order is selected when the push order bell is won, the number of payouts out of the bells of high eyed bells (small combinations of small wins). It may be referred to as a bell (small part) in which the combination of the symbols, such as the most small part, is displayed most advantageously to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the incorrect push order when the push order bell is won, there are cases in which the low-angle bell wins and the case in which the winning combination occurs according to the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, the stopped eyes (combination of symbols on the effective line, also referred to as "spilled eyes") displayed at the time of dropping of the role are referred to as "pattern symbols" in this embodiment, and have pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, when replay replay is won (Replay B, Replay C), combinations of different symbols are stopped and displayed according to the pressing order of the stop switch, but no replay occurs when replay is won (PB = 1 described later) ").
In this case, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols for transitioning to an RT having a higher probability of winning a replay, or a pressing order for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for maintaining an RT having a high probability of winning a replay It is called "pushing order" or "promotion pushing order".
On the other hand, the press order in which the combination of symbols transitioning from a favorable RT (for example, a replay winning probability is high) to a disadvantageous RT (for example, a low replay winning probability) for the player is stopped is displayed. It is called "pushing order" or "falling (demotion) pushing order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the "advantage operation mode" described above to the player.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the "instruction function" is a device for facilitating the winning of a small winning combination, the "instruction function" displays the correct push order for winning the correct push order (high-order bell) when the push order bell is won. Replay does not include displaying the order of pressing the correct answer for winning an advantageous replay (replay for transitioning to an advantageous RT, or replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of replay double winning.

In the following embodiment, the "instruction function" refers to the function of displaying the "advantage operation mode" to the player, and the "operation of the instruction function" is to display the correct push order when the push order bell is won. It is used in the sense that it includes both displaying the correct pressing order which wins the replay which is advantageous at the time of and replay replay winning combination.
In addition, showing "instructions" contents to the player is "display", and notifying the player of instruction contents is "notification". Therefore, the "instruction function" is also a "display function" and a "notification function".
Also, "instruction" is a concept having the meaning of "instruction", but the player is not charged any penalty even if he does not follow "instruction". However, if the correct pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not obeyed, the high order bell may not be won when the winning order bell is won, or the disadvantageous replay may be won when the replay duplicate is won.

In addition, the “instruction function operation game” is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, replay C Group game) means a game in which the instruction function is operated. For this reason, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may be also referred to as a notification game.
Moreover, even if it is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not the instruction function operated game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes the “normal section”, the “standby section”, and the “favorable section”.
First, the "normal section" refers to a signal relating to an instruction function, specifically, a pressing order instruction number to be described later, winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct pressing order), peripheral substrates (for example, It refers to a game section that prohibits transmission to a substrate), and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not operate the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the instruction function can not be operated, and a game section in which the display of the advantageous operation mode can not be performed. However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).
In the normal section, the indication function can not be activated, so that pressing order indication information can not be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral substrate, display (notification) of an advantageous operation mode can not be performed by the image display device electrically connected to the sub control substrate described later.

Note that the "normal section" in the present embodiment is a game section in which determination (lottery, etc.) can be made as to whether or not to shift to an advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (lottery etc.) (the advantageous section lottery possible section) and to determine whether to shift to an advantageous section ( It is also possible to provide a second normal section (a period in which the advantageous section can not be drawn) in which the lottery and the like can not be performed.
For example, when the transition condition to the second normal section is satisfied in the first normal section (for example, when a specific condition device is won), the transition to the second normal section may be mentioned. Alternatively, after the special combination (for example, 1BB) operation ends (after the special game ends), shifting to the second normal section may be mentioned uniformly or under predetermined conditions.
In addition, the transition from the second normal section to the first normal section is the completion of a predetermined number of games, the winning of a predetermined condition device, the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, a predetermined RT (for example, staying in a plurality of RTs) It may be conditional on transition to the highest ratio RT).

Further, the "advantage zone" is a game zone having a performance related to the instruction function (which may operate the instruction function). Specifically, when the instruction function is operated, the instruction content in the main control board This refers to a game section which can transmit a signal relating to an instruction function to the sub control board only when the pressing order instruction information is displayed so that (advantage operation mode) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), and in which the advantageous operation mode can be displayed (or displayed). The game during the advantageous section may also be referred to as a notification-enabled game. Conversely, the game during the normal section or the game during the standby section may be referred to as a notification impossible game.
However, the sub control board can not output an instruction content issued by the main control board or an effect contrary to the received signal relating to the instruction function.

  And, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, it is possible to obtain the maximum payout number ("9") corresponding to the specified number ("3") in the game (when the character is inactive) capable of executing the instruction function operation game. In a game in which a condition device (small part B group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, at least one game or more is performed to instruct the operation mode of the stop switch in which the part (small part 01) related to the maximum payout number wins It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small winning combination B group and a small winning combination C group are provided as a so-called pushing order bell condition device.
In the small combination B group, the small combination 01, which is a nine-piece combination, always wins when the pressing order is correct, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the one-piece combination can be won (may be dropped).
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, the small winning combination 02, which is the three winning combination, always wins when the pressing order is correct, and the single winning combination always wins when the pressing order is incorrect.

And, the game when executing the indication function operation game is at the time of bonus non-operation (normal game), the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Furthermore, the maximum payout number when the specified number is “3” is “9” (at the time of the small winning combination 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of the present embodiment, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is achieved by activating the instruction function when the condition device (small winning combination B group) in which the small winning combination 01 can be won It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

In addition, during the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device having the advantageous operation mode is won, the indication function may be always operated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even in the advantageous section, even if the game is won in the condition device having the advantageous operation mode, it does not matter if the indication function is not activated.

Furthermore, the "standby section" refers to a game section when it has not been shifted to the advantageous section after deciding to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may shift to the advantageous section, or the normal section may shift to the standby section, and the standby section may shift to the advantageous section. Note that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and always shifts to the normal section after the advantageous section ends. The standby section can be shifted only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, and corresponds to the special part You must finish by all means in the game where the combination of the symbols is displayed. Of course, it may be finished before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, it is not possible to activate the indication function in the main control board or to transmit a signal relating to the indication function to the sub control board. In the case where the instruction function is activated in the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub control board, it is a condition that it is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of this embodiment, the case of executing a single command function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group and the replay C group) and the case of executing the predetermined number of games Have.
In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are executed, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically operated.
In addition, the termination condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, for example, a lottery is performed at a predetermined timing, and the advantageous section is terminated when the lottery is won, etc. May be

Alternatively, just by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not the instruction function operational game is to be executed under the condition that it is in the advantageous section. When it is determined to execute the command function operation game, the command function operation game may be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not the (remaining) number of games of the advantageous section is to be added (added).
In addition, the upper limit game frequency is defined in the advantageous zone, and when the upper limit game frequency is reached, the advantageous zone is always ended at that point even if it has the remaining game frequency of the advantageous zone (limiter ), Shift to the normal section.

  Furthermore, when the upper limit game number is reached, the condition device (small part B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring the maximum payout number ("9" sheets) may not have been won even once. Even if the combination (small part 01) related to the maximum payout number does not indicate the operation mode of the stop switch to be won at one time, it always ends the advantageous section at that point (the operation of the limiter), Transfer to the section.

In the following embodiments, the detailed description of the AT (instruction function operation section, notification game section) will be omitted. The AT is a game section in which, whenever a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is always activated or the instruction function is activated frequently.
The relationship between the advantageous section and the AT can be set arbitrarily. However, during AT, it is always necessary to be in the advantageous section. For example, "advantage zone = AT" may be set. In this case, AT continues throughout the advantageous section.
In addition, non-AT and AT may be repeated (performed at least one AT) during the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, the advantageous section is a chance zone (CZ), and the AT is executed when the AT execution condition is satisfied during the advantageous section (CZ), but the AT is executed when the AT execution condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to end the advantageous section. However, as described above, the condition device (small combination B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring the maximum payout number (“9” in the following embodiment) at least once when shifting to the advantageous section. When winning, it is necessary to activate the pointing function. However, if the small winning combination B has not won even once in a predetermined number of games (for example, 1500 games), which is the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous section, the advantageous section without activating the instruction function even once You may complete the

The draw-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired pattern to be stopped on the active line can be stopped on the effective line from the moment the stop switch is operated to the time the reel stops. Show.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving symbols), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (up to the active line The fact that it can not be pulled in is referred to as "PB (retraction rate) ≠ 1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. It is called "1".

And "PB = 1" has a case where all reels are such and a case where it is so only for a specific (partial) reel.
In the present embodiment, the maximum moving number of frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1" and more than 5 symbols (6 symbols or more) When arranged at intervals, "PB ≠ 1". In particular, the number of symbols of the reel according to the present embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, the symbol is "PB = 1".

If the game proceeds with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" When it is an eye, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game". Also, the game of the "N-1" game eye is referred to as the "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game eye is referred to as “next game”.

"Displacement rate" is a value calculated by medal payout number expected value / medal insertion number, and when it is "1", it is a current maintenance state, and when it exceeds "1", medals increase. In the state, when it is less than "1", the medal is in the state of decreasing.
Further, the “expected value for the number of medals paid out” is calculated as the sum of “probability of winning the winning combination × number of paid out” for all the winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

  Furthermore, the "difference number" is a value calculated by "the number of medals paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected number of medals paid out)-the number of inserted medals". When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, When the difference number exceeds “0” and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number is less than “0”.

"Bet" means betting on medals (game media) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (prescribed number) is set to 3 at the time when the bonus is not in operation (during normal game). On the other hand, while the bonus (1BB) is in operation, the number of bets (prescribed number) available for playing is set to two. In order to bet medals, the actual medals are maintained from the medal insertion port, or the bet switch is operated to bet on the stored medals.
On the other hand, "reserved" means that medals are credited to the inside of the slot machine 10, unlike the "bet". Although "storage" may be used in a meaning including a bet, in the present specification, when "storage" is used, it is used in a meaning not including a "bet". In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of sheets that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like.

"Care" means that the player inserts a medal directly from the medal insertion slot 43 described later.
The “maintenance bet” means that the player bets a medal by maintaining the medal from the medal insertion slot 43.
The “care storage” means that the player stores medals (adds credits) by cleaning the medals from the medal insertion slot 43.
"Bet medal" means a medal bet.
"Reserved medal" means a medal stored as a credit.

“Reserved bet” is to play a part or all of the medals stored as credits within the range in which the player can bet in the game by operating the bet switch 40 described later. It means to bet.
The “automatic bet” means that when the replay is won, the control processing of the slot machine 10 automatically bets the medals of the number betted in the previous game. The above-mentioned maintenance bet medals, stored bet medals, and stored medals can be settled after that, but medals automatically bet by a replay winning can not be settled.
The term "insertion" means to bet or store medals, including the above-mentioned care bet, care storage, storage bet, and automatic bet.
“Settlement” means paying out bet medals and / or stored medals to the player.

  “Payout” means paying out a medal to the player based on the winning combination, or paying out a medal by the above-mentioned settlement. When paying out the medals to the player based on the winning combination of the part, it includes both of storing as a credit and paying out an actual medal from a payout opening (not shown). In the payout in this embodiment, “50” sheets are stored as credits as credits, and control is performed such that medals whose stored number exceeds “50” are actually paid out to the player.

Note that the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment "pays out" the medals to the player is equivalent to the player "acquiring" the medals. Therefore, in the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, it is "payout of medals", and in the viewpoint of the player, it is "acquisition of medals". For this reason, for example, there are cases where it is called "payout (number)" and cases where it is called "acquisition (number)", but both have the same meaning.
Further, "gaming medium" is a medal in the present embodiment, but in the case of, for example, an enclosed type gaming machine, electronic information is used as the gaming medium. For example, when money (banknote) is inserted into the lending machine, "electronic information" is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on the gaming machine Can be stored in a game machine as a game medium for performing the game.

In the MPU (one-chip microprocessor) of this embodiment, the A, B, C, D, E, H, and L registers (seven registers) can be used at the time of operation.
Furthermore, an F (flag) register is provided as one of the registers (A register, H register, etc.) used in the present embodiment. The F register is made up of D0 to D7 bits, like the other registers. A carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, and a zero flag is assigned to the D6 bit.
The "carry flag" executes arithmetic processing (for example, addition processing, subtraction processing, AND operation processing, OR operation processing, exclusive OR operation, etc. The same applies hereinafter), and the overflow or the borrow is caused by the operation result. Becomes "1" when it occurs. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is executed and the overflow or the borrow does not occur according to the operation result, it becomes “0”.
The “zero flag” is “1” when the calculation process is performed and the calculation result is “0”. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is executed and the arithmetic result does not become "0", it becomes "0".

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (especially, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with an "H" at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is described as "00010000 (B)" in binary, and is described as "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Moreover, about the numerical value which means a decimal number, it describes with "16 (D)" as needed.
However, when it is clear which of the binary number, the decimal number, and the hexadecimal number is clear, the end symbols of "B", "D" and "H" may be omitted.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
First Embodiment
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes the RWM 53, the ROM 54, the main CPU 55, and the like (not meant to include only those illustrated in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as a bet switch 40 are input ports 51 (input ports 0 to 2 etc. described later) or output ports 52 (output port described later) (0 to 7 etc.) are electrically connected. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit to transmit a signal to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows directing signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are arrows indicated from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary for displaying management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, executes programs necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. Specifically, lottery of the winning combination, drive control of the reel 31, and winning time To pay out, etc.
The main CPU 55 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Further, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, an MPU including a main CPU 55, and a register are mounted. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside as well as those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. The RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside as well as those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disapproving the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout opening when medal insertion is not permitted. Do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of the medal during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the stop of all the reels 31 and until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the combination is won). Do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the medals to be inserted at least when no game is played.

An input sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In the present embodiment, the insertion sensor 44 is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance, and after the medal is detected by one of the insertion sensors 44a, the other insertion sensor 44b has elapsed. It is configured to be detected by Then, based on the timing at which the pair of insertion sensors 44 are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the correct medal has been inserted.
In the following, when referring to the entire input sensor 44, it will be referred to as "input sensor 44". Further, in the flowcharts described later, the input sensor 44a may be abbreviated as "input sensor 1", and the input sensor 44b may be abbreviated as "input sensor 2".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and a settlement switch 46 as electric switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bed switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bed switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or prescribed number) medals are provided.
In addition, you may provide not only this but the bet switch for 2 bets.

  In addition, although the specified number of this embodiment is set to three when the bonus is not in operation and two when the bonus is in operation, two medals when the 1-bed switch 40a is operated twice (pressed). Can be inserted, and when it is operated (pressed) three times, three medals can be inserted. In addition, while the prize is in operation, by operating the 3 bet switch 40b, it is possible to insert two (prescribed number) medals at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all for left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle and right) reels 31, and are switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (payout) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected, as shown in the figure. In 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control substrate 50 and the display substrate 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another substrate may be interposed between the two.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another separate board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other substrates (relay substrate or the like) may be interposed between the main control substrate 50 and the sub control substrate 80.

On the display substrate 75, a storage number display LED 76, an acquisition number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are mounted. The LEDs 76, 78, and 79 are provided in the vicinity of the operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize. The LEDs 76, 78, and 79 need not be provided on one display substrate 75. For example, as in the case of the display substrates 75A and 75B, the display substrates 75 are provided, and any one of the display substrates 75 is provided. The LEDs 76, 78, and 79 may be provided.
The details of the above storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 will be described later (FIG. 16).

In FIG. 1, the motor 32 of the symbol display device and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels (three in the present embodiment) for displaying symbols, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each of the reels 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, and when the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side surface of the reel 31 and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the pattern on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 which is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals, which are maintained and accepted from the medal insertion slot 43, are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a "shoot portion").
In the present embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 comprises a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged at a predetermined distance, and after a predetermined time has passed since the medal is detected by one payout sensor 37a It is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37b. Then, based on the timing when each of the pair of payout sensors 37 is turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly dispensed.
In the following, when referring to the entire payout sensor 37, it is referred to as "payout sensor 37". Further, in a flowchart to be described later, the payout sensor 37a may be abbreviated as "payout sensor 1", and the payout sensor 37b may be abbreviated as "payout sensor 2".

For example, when the signals from the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both OFF even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that a medal has not been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch that turns on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion port and rotated right 90 degrees (clockwise), and is turned on at the time of setting confirmation or setting change.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing the setting value. For example, every time the setting is changed, the setting value is incremented by one. In the present embodiment, setting values have setting 1 to setting 6, and during setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value is “1” → “2” →... →→ “6” → It changes with "1" →. In addition, any setting value is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is decided.

Further, when the power switch 11 is turned on while turning on this switch, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, initialization processing is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open / close state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external concentrated terminal plate 100 is output from part of the output port 52 (output port 4 in FIG. 20 described later).
Here, the “external signal” is a signal for outputting to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hole computer 200, data counter installed in a hole, etc.) via the external concentrated terminal plate 100. In this embodiment, as an external signal, a signal relating to an AT (advantage zone) or a special game, a signal indicating that an error occurred in the slot machine 10 or a recovery from a power off (a power on), a slot machine A signal indicating opening of the front door 10, a medal bet signal, a medal payout signal, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 controls selection, output, and the like of effects (information) during game play and game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control command) necessary for output of presentation.
The main control substrate 50 and the sub control substrate 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connections using optical communication means. Further, both of the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub control board 80 is electrically connected to effect peripheral devices such as the following effect lamps 21 as shown in FIG. 1 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data acquired when the sub CPU 85 controls an effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program for performing a lottery relating to an effect, various data, and the like as effect data.

  The effect lamp 21 is, for example, an LED or the like, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the effect lamp 21 is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols continuous in the vertical direction seen from the display window 17) disposed on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 from behind, the reel 31 A fluorescent lamp for illuminating the symbols on the reels 31 from the top of the frame, a frame lamp arranged on the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinking at the time of winning of the winning combination and the like are included.

In addition, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 includes a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display and the like, and various effect images (a correct pressing order, an effect corresponding to a lottery result of the condition device, etc.) Game information (such as the number of times of game operation and the number of games acquired during a bonus operation or an advantageous section) is displayed.
In addition, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 change various settings when displaying information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is a player's game history) or a hole manager (such as a store manager). It is used when you

Subsequently, a combination of symbols and combinations of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 2 is a view showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 2, symbol numbers are shown together. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 2, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In addition, in the figure, "blank" does not mean that a symbol is not displayed at all, but a predetermined symbol corresponding to "blank" is displayed.
In addition, although "bell A", "bell B", and "bell C" are patterns whose appearances are similar, they are respectively different patterns.

3A shows the positional relationship between the display windows (transparent windows) 17 provided on the front door (front door; not shown) of the slot machine 10 and the respective reels 31 and the effective lines (symbols). (Display line for displaying a combination).
Three reels (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the lateral direction in the present embodiment. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three designs which are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. The numbers at the lower right of each symbol indicate the symbol number.

Moreover, FIG. 3 (B) has shown the admiration of the symbol position in this specification. In this specification, the symbol position at the time of stopping visible from the display window 17 is referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in order from top to bottom for each reel 31. , “Left middle stage”, “lower left stage”.
Furthermore, as shown to FIG. 3 (A), the effective line is set with respect to nine patterns seen from the display window 17. FIG.

  Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a combination of symbols, and of the symbol corresponding to any one of the roles. When the combination is stopped on the line, it is a line that wins the part. In this embodiment, one effective line ("lower left stage"-"middle middle stage"-straight line passing through "upper right stage") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines become invalid lines. There is.

  An invalid line is a line which is not set as an effective line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the symbols is stopped at that line, the provision of a profit according to the combination It is a line that does not pay out medals, etc. That is, an invalid line is a line which is not a formation object of a combination of symbols from the beginning.

  Also, conventionally, slot machines having different numbers of valid lines according to the number of medals inserted are known. For example, when the number of medals inserted is one, the number of valid lines is one when the number of medals inserted is three, and when the number of medals inserted is three, the number of effective lines is five. And the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and one game shown in FIG. 3A is an effective line in all the games. There is no change in the number of valid lines due to the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in the present specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 4-9 is a figure which shows the combination of the kind of combination (the combination etc. contained in the condition apparatus drawn by the combination lottery means 61 mentioned later) in this embodiment, payout number etc., and a symbol. In FIG. 9, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are shown as combinations of symbols displayed when the winning combination is missed, although they are not winning combinations, but they are selected (numbers “101” to "120").

The roles in this embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays (replay roles), and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, a combination of symbols corresponding to one of the combinations is stopped on the active line (the combination of winnings is the same). The number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning of the special part is set to zero. Also, in replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  In FIG. 4 to FIG. 9, "the prescribed number 3" displayed on the number of payouts etc. indicates the number of payouts etc. when the prescribed number is 3 (when the bonus is inactive, ie, the number of inserted coins in normal game) , “The prescribed number 2” indicates the number of payouts and the like when the prescribed number is 2 (the number of inserted items during bonus game operation, ie, during special game). For example, Replay 01 of the number "3" indicates that the prescribed number of three will be replayed, and the prescribed number of two "-" indicates that the lottery is not made.

In FIG. 4, numbers “1” and “2” correspond to special roles (features). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special part is a part to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When the player wins 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game is transferred to the 1BB game corresponding to the special game (action of a bonus).
It is an advantageous game for the player who can expect medals to be won more than when the bonus item is inoperative by setting the payout rate to "1" or more during the 1BB game (when the bonus item is in operation). .

Also, Replay (replay role) is a role that enables replay with maintaining the number of medals inserted in the current game (automatic bet on medals). For example, when the prescribed number of games this time is "3", the replay is won, and when the prescribed number of games next time is "2", the number of medals inserted in this game is not maintained, and the next time A predetermined number of games, "2" may be automatically betted.
The replay according to the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers "3" to "13") as shown in FIG.
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are to be transferred to another RT when winning in a particular RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 is won in RT2, the game is shifted to RT3 (RT that is advantageous to the player) from the next game. For this reason, Replay 02 is also referred to as promotion Replay.
In addition, when Replay 03 is won in RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than RTs up to that time). For this reason, Replay 03 is also referred to as fall (relegation) replay.

  Replays 04 and 05 are first used as control replays aiming to increase the number of types of conditional devices by winning a plurality of replays in duplicate, and in the present embodiment, among the conditional devices to be described later, Replay included in Replay B2, B3, C2, C3 or E. When the player wins the replay B2, B3, C2 or C3, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay is not stopped at the effective line.

Furthermore, Replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rear play, and included in Replay E of the condition device described later. When Replay E is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.
Also, Replay 06 is a Replay that is drawn during the 1BB operation, and is included in Replay D of the condition device described later. When Replay D in the advantageous section is won, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4 to FIG. 8, the small winning combination includes small winning combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). The small roles 01 and 02 are small roles (small roles corresponding to high-pitched bells) to be won when the correct answer is made when the correct bell is selected as described later. Further, the small winning combination 03 to 34 is a small winning combination (a small winning combination corresponding to a low bell) which can be won (PB ≠ 1) at the time of incorrect release at the time of winning bell selection.
Furthermore, the minors 35 to 38 are rare minors (a minor corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Furthermore, the minors 39 and 40 are minors that can be won only when the specified number is two, that is, when the bonus is activated.

  The pattern symbols 01 to 03, as described above, are not the part itself but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pushing order is incorrect when the pushing order is elected. It is a combination of symbols. Furthermore, in the pattern pattern, when the combination of the symbols is stopped at the effective line in a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1 or RT3), the RT is shifted (in this embodiment, it is shifted to RT2) It is a combination. In this embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are always made to appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the winning combination is incorrect when the small winning combination B is won. However, other symbol combinations (not the role itself) may appear.

In each role mentioned above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role does not stop on the activated line in the game won by the role, the role carried over after the next game and the role not carried over are defined. .
The part carried over is 1BB in the present embodiment. When the player wins 1BB, it is controlled to carry over the winning information of 1BB after the next game in the game until 1BB wins.

  On the other hand, the 1BB winning is carried over, but the minors and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when the small winning combination or the replay is won, the winning combination becomes effective only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game in which these roles have been won, the reel 31 is stop-controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning roles can be won, but regardless of the presence or absence of the winning combination, at the end of the game , The right concerning the winning combination disappears.

  When starting the game, the player inserts the medals stored in advance by the operation of the bet switch 40 (reserved bet), or the maintenance insertion of the medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (cared bed). When the start switch 41 is operated with the defined number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 performs lottery of the roles by the role lottery means 61 and drives and controls all the motors 32 to obtain all reels. Control 31 to rotate. In this manner, the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32, whereby the design on the reel 31 is moved and displayed up and down in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to correspond to the lottery result of the combination lottery unit 61 As described above, stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of the symbols when all the reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any one of the winning combinations is stopped on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are illustrative, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.
In addition, “the winning of the condition device” is also referred to as a winning lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.

  The role lottery means 61 is based on, for example, random number generation means for lottery (hardware random number etc.), random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and random number values extracted by the random number extraction means. And a determination unit that determines whether or not the condition device has been won and the condition device that has won the condition device.

  The random number generation means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec continues counting as 1 cycle in the range of “0” to “65535”, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player in the present embodiment at a predetermined time. The determination means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table described later to determine the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs. For example, when the extracted random number value belongs to the area of winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that replay A is won.

10 to 13 are diagrams showing types of condition devices to be randomly selected by the role lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combinations included in the respective condition devices.
In the following description, the description of the condition device is mainly made, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pushing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing at the time of winning each condition device are explained by the reel control means 65. Do.

As described above, the condition device according to the present embodiment does not carry over the winning information to the next game, "the item condition device" which is a condition device including any of the special roles capable of carrying over the winning information to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a conditional device that includes either a small winning combination or a replay.
The winning of the item condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB in this embodiment.
The feature condition device number "0" corresponds to the non-winning of the special role, the feature condition device number "1" corresponds to the winning of 1BBA, and the feature condition device number "2" is the winning of 1BBB. Equivalent to.

Also, for example, when Replay A is won, the item condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “1”.
On the other hand, when the 1BBA alone is won, the item condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case in which 1BB and the small winning combination will be double winning, for example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are double winning, the item condition device number is “1”, winning and replay condition device number Will be "26".
When 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay are dually won, the winning combination of the small winning combination or the replay is prioritized in the current game (the priority can be set arbitrarily). Further, since the winning of the small winning combination or the replay is effective only in the current game, it is not carried over to the next game, but the 1BB winning information is carried over to the next game unless it is a prize.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to the non-winning of the part (so-called lost).
Also, Replay A of the condition device number “1” is a single win of Replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins in any pressing order (in any pressing order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter generically referred to) Each “Replay C Group” is a double winning of multiple types of Replays, and is a double winning including at least one of Replay 01 or 02. Then, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the type of replay to be won is set to be different.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number "2", the replay 02 wins in the pushing order of the left first stop, and the replay 01 wins other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In addition, in the case of repeated replay winning, since the replay (replay role) is won in any pushing order, there is no concept of high / low eye on payout of medals and the like. However, for example, when the player wins the replay B1 in RT2, the RT is promoted (transition from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the left first stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning a replay 01.
In addition, when the player wins the replay C1 in RT3, the RT1 is maintained by winning the replay 01 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT is made to fall (demotion) (transition from RT3 to RT2) by winning a replay 03.

The replay D with the condition device number “8” is a single replay 06 replay. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins in any order.
Similarly, Replay E of the condition device number “9” is a duplicate winning of Replay 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins in any order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as rear play. In the present embodiment, in particular, when the lottery is made at RT1 and the replay E is won during the RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.

In FIG. 11, the small winning combination A of the condition device number “10” is a so-called common bell, and the small winning combination 01 is a single winning. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins (PB = 1) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
Further, in FIG. 11 to FIG. 12, the small roles B1 to B12 of condition device numbers "11" to "22" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small group B group") correspond to so-called pushing order bells , And a small winning combination 01 including at least one of nine small bells (nine bells, nine winning combinations) and a small winning combination 03 to 34 (one winning combination).

  When these condition devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when it is the correct pressing order, a small winning combination 01 having a high eye bell (9 bells and 9 prizes) with "PB = 1" is won. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated), the small part 03 which is a low bell (one sheet) There is a case where .about.34 wins and a case where none of the small winning combination wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to dropping).

In FIG. 13, the small roles C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small group C group") of the condition device numbers "23" to "25" are so-called pressed as in the above-mentioned small group B group. It corresponds to a forward bell, and is a double winning including a small part 02 (three bells, three sheets) and a small part 03 to 10 (one sheet).
When these condition devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when it is the correct pressing order, the small winning combination 02 having a high eye bell (three bells and three wins) with "PB = 1" is won. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect release order, one of the small prizes 03 to 10, which is a low-order bell (one-piece winning combination), is won with "PB = 1". Therefore, when winning the small winning combination C group, unlike when winning the small winning combination B group, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (dropped). In addition, you may have the case where not only this but any small part wins.

At the time of winning the small part B group, it will be paid out nine sheets at the time of winning the high bell, so when it is the correct order of pressing, there will be three in (insertion number) and nine out (disbursed number), the difference in this game The number is "+6". Therefore, when the pushing order is correct, the number of medals increases, and when the pushing order is incorrect (the number of payouts is one or zero), the medal device decreases.
On the other hand, in the small part C group, since 3 payouts will be made when the high bell is won, 3 ins (number of inserted sheets) and 3 out (number of paid outs) will be obtained in the present game The difference number of is “± 0”. Therefore, at the time of correct pressing, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and at the time of incorrect answering of the pressing order (the number of payouts is one), it becomes a condition device in which the number of medals decreases.

  As described above, the reason for providing both the pushing order bell which gives out 9 sheets in the correct pushing order and the pushing order bell which gives out 3 sheets is for adjusting the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, at the time of pressing order incorrect at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the probability of winning one winning combination is 25%, and the other 75% have pattern symbols. Is set to be displayed (no payout at the time of pattern symbol display). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13, when the winning combination of the small winning combination C group is incorrect, one winning combination is made with “PB = 1”. In this way, by providing two types of push order bells with different payout numbers depending on the push order correct answer time and the incorrect answer time, and by appropriately setting the winning probability, it is possible to set the payout rate to an appropriate range. become.

The minor role D of the condition device number "26" corresponds to the rare minor role (watermelon). The small role D is a single winning of the small portion 35, and is set to "PB」 1 ".
Further, the small combination E1 of the condition device number "27" and the small combination E2 of the condition device number "28" correspond to the rare small combination (cherry) similarly to the small combination D1. The small combination E1 is a double combination of the small combinations 36 and 38, and the small combination E2 is a double combination including the small combination 37 in addition to the small combinations 36 and 38 described above. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the two-piece winning combination (small winning combination 36 or 38) is won regardless of the pushing order.

The small combination F of the condition device number “29” is a combination to be drawn only during 1BB operation (1BB game), and is a double winning of the small combinations 01 to 39. When the small winning combination F is won, the small winning combination 39, which is a 10-piece winning combination, wins with “PB = 1”.
The small combination G with the condition device number "30" is a combination to be drawn only during 1BB operation (1BB game), and the small combination 40 is a single winning. When the small winning combination G is won, the small winning combination 40, which is a nine-piece winning combination, wins with "PB = 1".

  FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 show the winning probability defined by the lottery table when the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and shows the number of item condition devices and winning and replay condition devices for each RT. FIG. If the numerical value shown in FIG.14 and FIG.15 is divided by "65536", it will become a winning probability. For example, in the non-RT and any of RT1 to RT3, the prefix number for 1 BBA is set to “20” and “10” (total of “30”). Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 14 is a table of number tables of condition devices which can be determined to be common to the setting and to shift to the advantageous section, or capable of performing the addition of the advantageous section (or capable of performing the addition lottery).
Here, "setting common" indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same value.
Then, when the condition device common to the setting is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (it is decided to be added during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( During the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a conditional device that decides to shift to the advantageous section (decides to add during the advantageous segment) and a conditional device that decides not to shift to the advantageous section (decides to not add to the advantageous segment) You may provide.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to settings shown in FIG. 14 is provided with a condition device which decides to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device which decides not to shift to the advantageous section. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, it is always set as a condition device that decides to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 14, in the normal section, “o” means deciding to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means deciding not to shift to the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section, “Δ” means to determine to add the advantageous section, and “x” means to determine to not add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 14, “o” is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” is decided to shift to the advantageous section, but not limited to this, “o” is It means to draw lots whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean to draw whether or not to add the advantageous section.

Further, FIG. 15 shows the condition device and the number thereof which are not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and are not determined to add the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device that decides to shift to the advantageous section or decides to add the advantageous section is limited to the winning of the condition apparatus shown in FIG. In the case of winning, none of them decide to shift to the advantageous section, nor decide to add the advantageous section.
Although FIG. 15 representatively shows the setting numbers of setting 1 and setting 6, actually, as described above, the setting value has six stages of setting 1 to setting 6, and setting is performed. There is a fixed number for each value.

In FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, since the conditional devices including 1BBA or 1BBB are drawn only in the non-internal portion, they are drawn by non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Further, 1BBA and 1BBB have a single winning case and a double winning case with a small player D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a single winning case. The conditional device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn at RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small part D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the storage number for single winning combination of small part D in RT4 is “580” to “585” in total, and the storage number for single winning combination in small part E1 in RT4 is “1030” in total, The suffixes for single winning of the small winning combination E2 in RT4 are “310” to “370” in total.
Also, 1 BBB is set to the winning combination when the conditional device having the setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of 1 BBB, or to decide to add the advantageous section. There is nothing to do.

Also, Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the end of the operation of 1 BBB, it shifts to RT1. Then, when the replay E is won in this RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set so as not to appear in other RTs, a lottery for replay E is made only at RT1.
Furthermore, the small roles D and E1 are drawn only when the character is inactive and not when the character is active.
On the other hand, the small roles F and G are not drawn at the time of the non-operation of the item, but are drawn only at the time of the operation of the item.

  Further, in FIG. 14, although the sum of the number of single winning of 1BBA is “30”, in the present embodiment, the number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a unit number "10" which decides not to shift. That is, in the case where the single winning of 1 BBA is made, if the number of “20” is won, when the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is simultaneously won. On the other hand, in the case where the single BBA is won, if it is elected to the number "10", it will be non-winning of the advantageous section.

In addition, when a single BBA is won during the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section is to be added to either of the units "20" and "10".
Similarly, although the combination number for the single winning combination E1 is "1000" in total, in the present embodiment, the combination interval "250" determined to shift to the advantageous interval in the normal interval and the advantageous interval It is divided into "750" which is decided not to shift to

The present invention is not limited to this, and the single winning combination number of the small combination E1 is set to one number “1000” (not divided into the number “250” and the number “750”), and when winning the small combination E1. Alternatively, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be determined by lottery separately. For example, it may be decided to shift to the advantageous segment with a probability of 25% and not decided to transition to the advantageous segment with a probability of 75%. As described above, although it is possible to provide a unit number to be elected to the advantageous section from the beginning and a unit number not to be elected to the advantageous section, the unit number itself is one value, and when elected to that unit number, transition to the advantageous section You may make it perform the lottery (two-step lottery) of whether to do or not.
Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when RT4 (inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even when winning a small part D or E1, when it is RT4, it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 14). .

In FIG. 15, when it becomes a single winning of 1 BBB and a double winning of 1 BBB and a small winning combination D, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, as described later, after the completion of the operation of 1BBB (after the transition to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided.
The small role E2 has a case of double winning with 1BBB and a case of single winning, but neither makes a decision regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the determination regarding the advantageous section may be made for both the single winning combination of the small winning combination E1 and the double winning combination with 1BBA.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, although the condition devices of Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group are common in setting, they are not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and are added in the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 14 and 15. When these condition devices for replay are selected, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or decided to include an advantageous section (including a lottery). ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 15, in Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, the setting numbers are slightly different between Setting 1 and Setting 6 (for example, “1” is different), Replay A, Replay B Group, The Replay C group may be set separately.

  In FIG. 15, Replay A is drawn at all RTs when the character is inactive. Also, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, Replay C group is drawn only at RT3. The small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group all have setting differences between setting 1 and setting 6, but the setting numbers are the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of "special role and small role" in FIG. 15, in the setting 1 and the setting 6, the winning probability of 1BB and the small role is set higher for the setting 6. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the "Replay" table, the winning probability of replay is the highest at RT3. And, in the advantageous section, because it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only increase the medals by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning bell order, it will be a gaming state with a small reduction of medals by replay winning .

Further, the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group are all set in the condition device having the setting difference. Here, the digit number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination A is “250”, and the digit number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination B group (whole) is “240 (20 × 12) ". Therefore, the small role A has a larger difference in unit number than the small role B group. As a result, by setting the number of small combination A having no prize difference according to the pushing order to a larger value, it is possible to reliably provide the difference in the payout rate according to the set value.
In addition, since the combination of symbols that can be won when winning a small winning combination A and the combination of symbols that can be won when the pressing combination is correct when winning a small winning combination B group are set the same (described later) The setting value can not be estimated by counting the number of winnings (winnings) of.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 15, the probability of winning in the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning in the small winning combination C group. Here, the maximum payout number is 9 when the prescribed number is 3, and during the advantageous section, the number of payouts is 9 (maximum payout number with 3 prescribed numbers) at least one of the indicated function operating games. Need to run once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the small winning combination B is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small winning combination B group to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning combination C group, one-time instruction function operation game (small winning combination C, replay B, replay C) is won Can be reduced the expected number of times of the game in the advantageous section ending only with the played game). Furthermore, despite the fact that the game has been played a predetermined number of times, although it is an advantageous section, it is less likely that the advantageous section can not be ended because it has never won a small winning combination B during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning flag control unit 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery unit 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (a winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when the player wins the replay B1, the two winning flags of Replay 01 and Replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in a non-internal medium game, when winning a small combination B1, the small combination 01, the small combination 03, the small combination 10, the small combination 11, the small combination 18, the small combination 19 and the small combination included in the condition device The seven winning flags of the role 26 are on, and the winning flags of the other roles are off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the winnings of small winnings other than 1BB and replays are not carried over, even if the winnings for small playings or replays are made in the game this time and the winning flags of these playings are turned on, the game ends Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the 1BB win is carried over, when the 1BB wins in the game this time and the win flag related to the 1BB won is once turned on, the on state is maintained until the 1BB wins, It will be turned off when 1BB wins.

  In addition, for example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are won by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 corresponding to the 1BBA and the small winning combination D is turned on, and there is no case that both the combination wins Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA does not win, the on flag of 1 BBA is maintained and the win flag of small bonus 35 is turned off, regardless of whether or not the small winning combination 35 has or has not won.

Furthermore, for example, when the single lottery is won by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of the 1BBA is turned on in the current game, and when the 1BBA is not won in the current game, the winning flag of the 1BBA is maintained .
Furthermore, in the next game, when the small winning combination A1 is won, in addition to the 1BBA carrying the winning, the small winning combination 01's winning flag is turned on, and when the 1BBA does not win at the end of the current game, 1BBA On of the winning flag of is maintained, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The pushing order instruction number selecting unit 63 selects the pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination drawing unit 61.
The “pushing order” of the pushing order designation number selected here means a pushing order that is advantageous for the player. For example, when the small winning combination B and the small winning combination C are won, this indicates the pushing order for winning the high bell. Also, when replay replay is won, it refers to pushing order to promote to an advantageous RT or pushing order not to fall to an adverse RT.
In either of the advantageous section and the normal section, the push order instruction number selecting unit 63 may select the push order instruction number, but not limited to this, for example, only in the advantageous section, The selection of the push order instruction number may be performed.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section. Therefore, even if the pressing order designation number is selected by the pressing order designation number selecting means 63 in the normal section (note that the pressing order designation number may or may not be selected in the normal section), the pressing order designation number indicates the sub control board It will not be sent to 80.
In the present embodiment, each condition device is provided with a unique push order instruction number.

The effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, and is for selecting a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
It is also conceivable to transmit the winning prize and replay condition apparatus number itself to the sub control board 80 as a result of the drawing of the condition apparatus. However, in the present embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device number itself is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, on the side of the sub control board 80, it is not possible to know the winning and replay condition device number (that is, the information on the correct pressing order) which has been won in the game this time.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the current game, the sub control board 80 can select and output an effect corresponding to the effect group number.

  The reel control means 65 controls to start the rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving a rotation start instruction of the reels 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in the present embodiment. Furthermore, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the current game after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. And when the stop switch 42 is operated, based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined, and the motor 32 is driven. Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 sets a combination of symbols corresponding to winning combinations (combinations in which the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. In addition to stop control of the reel 31 so as to be able to stop on the effective line, stop control of the reel 31 so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the roles other than the winning combination (combinations in which the winning flag is off) .

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving pieces (symbols)) It means within the range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving number of frames from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 is stopped is set to four.

  For example, in FIG. 2, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "Replay" of the left reel 31 is positioned at the lower left stage (on the effective line), four frames ahead, that is, the fifth "bell" Up to B "is the symbol that can be stopped at the lower left level. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bit stop) to No. 5 (4 komasubi) become symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum moving frame number to four from the symbol next to the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "Replay" of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left level, from the next symbol, that is, the second "blank", The symbol up to the 6th "Replay" which is the symbol of 4 frames ahead is the symbol that can be stopped at the lower left level. Therefore, at the above-mentioned operation timing, the symbols of No. 2 to No. 6 become symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is four from the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, the stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line. In addition, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, when the reel 31 is immediately stopped at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol relating to the winning combination is not stopped at the predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of (1), it is controlled to stop the symbol relating to the winning combination on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will stop on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel is stopped. By rotating and controlling the reel 31 within the range of stop control 31, control is performed so as not to stop the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination not winning the winning line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations have been won, the priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Perform the pull-in stop control of the most prioritized symbol.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the player operates the stop switch 42.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 65. By determining this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Furthermore, the reel control means 65 is provided with a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol ("Replay" in the case of the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), The stop position is determined in advance, such as moving control only for the symbols (in what kind of kosbery) and stopping the number of symbols in the lower left stage.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 2, four “Replays” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols on all the reels 31. Thus, "Replay" of all the reels 31 is arranged as "PB = 1".
Similarly, in the left reel 31, one of "BELL A" and "BELL B" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Further, in the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the "bell C" of the middle reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, one of "BELL A" and "BELL B" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.

Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four "cherrys" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the "cherry" of the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Further, on the left reel 31, four "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Similarly, in the middle reel 31, one of "Blue 7" and "Cherry" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Furthermore, similarly, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “blank”, or “red 7” is arranged on the right reel 31 at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning in these 4 symbol totals.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "Cherry" is disposed at the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and therefore, it is not the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, for “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 are in the “PB ≠ 1” arrangement, and the right reel 31 are in the “PB = 1” arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described based on FIGS. 10 to 13 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and replay condition device winning will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a non-winning game of a combination, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that combinations of symbols corresponding to any combination do not stop on the effective line.

  The Replay A table is used when Replay A is won (Replay 01 single winning), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the Replay 01 is stopped at the active line, It defines 31 stop positions. The symbols of each reel 31 pertaining to Replay 01 and Replays 02 to 06 described later are arranged in “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. Therefore, at the time of winning the replay, the replay that is always won (when a plurality of replays are duplicately won, one of the replays that is doublely won) is always prized.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line at the time of the first left stop (the order of correct pressing) and the first left stop Other than the time (when the pushing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 01 on the effective line (see FIG. 10).

First, in the game where the replay B1 table is used, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped in the lower left stage at the time of the first left stop (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left column.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, "replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Then, at the time of the third right stop, "Cherry" is stopped at the upper right stage. In this case, "Replay" is stopped at the lower right. As a result, "black 7 / watermelon"-"replay"-"cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and a replay 02 is won. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped at "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right corner".

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, at the first middle stop, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped at the middle middle stage ("PB = 1"). In this case, "Replay" is stopped at the middle and upper stages. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped in the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, “Replay” stops in the upper left row.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the upper right corner ("PB = 1"). As a result, "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Replay" is stopped on the effective line, and Replay 01 wins. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped in the "upper left row"-"middle upper row"-"upper right row".

In the game in which the Replay B1 table is used, the same control as at the middle first stop is obtained also at the first right stop.
Furthermore, with regard to the Replay B2 table at the time of Replay B2 winning and the Replay B3 table at the time of Replay B3 winning, the Replay 02 is awarded at the time of pressing correct and the Replay 01 is awarded at the time of incorrect pressing.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct) and the left first stop Other than the time (when the pushing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 03 on the effective line (see FIG. 10).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control to stop the replay 01 on the activated line at the time of the first left stop is the same as the replay B1 table, so the description will be omitted.
In addition, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, “replay” is stopped in the middle to middle (“PB = 1”) at the first stop in the middle. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, "Replay" stops in the middle left column. When the right reel 31 is stopped, "watermelon" is stopped in the upper right part ("PB = 1"). In this case, "Replay" stops at the middle right. As a result, "Belle A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" is stopped on the activated line, and Replay 03 is won. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped in the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row".

In the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control at the time of the first right stop is the same control as at the time of the first middle stop.
Furthermore, the Replay C2 table at the time of Replay C2 winning, and the Replay C3 table at the time of Replay C3 winning, also make Replay 01 win at the time of pressing order correct and Replay 03 at the time of incorrect order .

The Replay D table is used in the game when Replay D is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the stop position of the reel 31 is made to stop Replay 06 at the effective line. It was decided. Replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
In addition, the Replay E table is used in the game when Replay E is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the Reel 04 or 05 is stopped on the active line. It defines 31 stop positions. In this case, it is possible to stop either Replay 04 or 05 with “PB = 1”.

  The small combination A table is used in the game when the small combination A is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small combination 01 is stopped so as to stop the small combination 01 at the effective line. It defines the stop position. The combination of the symbols of the small part 01 is “black 7 / watermelon”-“bell C”-“replay”, and “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. Also, when "black 7 / watermelon" stops in the lower left row, "bell A / bell B" stops in the middle left row. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Belle A / Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, at the time of winning of the small part 01, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" is stopped at "Left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row".

  The small combination B1 table is used in the game when winning the small combination B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct), Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the one-piece combination included in the winning combination (one of the small combinations 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26 when the small combination B1 is won) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop on the effective line or to stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

At the time of the first left stop in the game where the small winning combination B1 table is used (pressing order correct answer), since it is the same as the small winning combination A table, the explanation will be omitted.
When the following tables B2 to B12 are used, the same stop control as the table A is performed when the pressing order is correct.
As a result, when the winning combination of the small winning combination A and the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins, and the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small winning combination 01 is won in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small winning combination A is won or the pressing order of the small winning combination B group is right.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is elected, if the instruction function is operated with a dummy as described above, it is the player whether the small winning combination A or the small combination B group is winning I do not know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since the winning combination number of the small winning combination A has a setting difference, it is possible to estimate the setting value by counting the number of times of winning of the small winning combination A. However, if the stop number is made the same between the winning combination of the small winning combination A and the winning combination of the small winning combination B, only the number of winning combinations of the small winning combination A can not be counted. You will not be able to guess.

Further, in the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 11, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 03: "Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Minor part 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers are dually won.
As a first priority, when it is possible to stop all of the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the combination of winning symbols on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all symbols that make up the combination of winning symbols on the activated line" (when it is not possible to adopt the first priority), the "number of sheets priority" is given as the second priority. The stop control of the reel 31 is performed by either "or number priority".
Here, “number priority” means that the symbols of the reel 31 that make up the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts among the combinations of the symbols winning in duplicate are preferentially stopped (drawn) in the effective line Say Therefore, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of (9) symbols having the largest payout number.
On the other hand, "number priority" means stopping the symbols of the reel 31 on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is the largest.

  For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, it is not possible to simultaneously stop all the middle reels 31 associated with the winning combination on the activated line. While there are multiple types of symbols of the middle reel 31 of the winning combination, there is only one valid line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the valid line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped by giving priority to the number when the pressing order is incorrect. When stop control of the reel is given by number priority, the small winning combination 01 (9-piece winning combination) is configured such that one winning combination can be made without winning (it has a case of being dropped).
As described above, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is performed such that the number of sheets is prioritized in the specific pushing order (the correct pushing order in the present embodiment) and the number priority is given in the other pushing order (the incorrect pushing order in the present embodiment). The number of sheets or the number of sheets is prioritized in accordance with.

In the above example, when giving priority to the number during middle first stop (pressing order incorrect answer), if either "BELL A" or "BELL B" is stopped on the valid line, it will stop on the valid line The number of possible symbol combinations is two each and is the maximum. For example, if "BELL A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won. Since "Bel A" or "Bell B" of middle reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the 2 symbol addition, when middle reel 31 stops, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped It can be done.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 stops. In this case, at this time, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won.

  Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the active line. As shown in FIG. 2, in the left reel 31, “bell A” is disposed at No. 15 and No. 0, and “bell C” is disposed at No. 18. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is 11th to 19th and 0th, "bell A" or "bell C" can be stopped on the effective line, When the number is 1 to 10, "BELL A" or "BELL C" can not be stopped at the valid line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "bell A" or "bell C" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since "bell A" can be stopped without stopping "bell C", the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are the 11th to 19th and 0th If so, always stop "BELL A" on the active line.
In this way, stopping "Bell A" without stopping "Bell C" enables display of pattern symbols described later when the winning combination is lost at the time of the third stop. This is because (when the "bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the pattern pattern can not be displayed).

  On the other hand, when the "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so as to stop any pattern pattern on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 9, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell A”, the symbol of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "black 7" or "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle and the second stop on the left, "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" .
Furthermore, when "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" before right third stop, when "bel A" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell A '. As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop "BELL A" on the effective line, if the symbol on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is in the range of No. 4 to No. 13, stop "BEL A" If it is in the other range, it can not stop "Bell A". Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "bell A" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "BELL A"-"BELL A"-"BELL A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is made effective. Stop it ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
Also, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that “BELL B” is stopped on the activated line at the first stop (due to wrong order of pressing) when the small winning combination B1 is won. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 18 can be won at this time.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell B” or “Red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small winning combination 10 or 18, at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 2, in the left reel 31, “bell B” is disposed at the fifth and tenth, and “red 7” is disposed at the seventh. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, otherwise In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can not be stopped on the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops on the effective line with a probability of “1/2”. In particular, in the present embodiment, since “bell B” can be stopped without stopping “red 7”, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is 1 to 10 Will always stop "BELL B" on the active line.

  On the other hand, when "the bell B" can not be stopped to an effective line at the time of stop of the left reel 31, it controls so that one pattern symbol is stopped to an effective line. As shown in FIG. 9, the pattern symbol whose symbol on the middle reel 31 is “bell B” is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "black 7" or "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the first stop in the middle and the second stop on the left, "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating" .
Furthermore, when "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" before the third right stop, "bell B" can be stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 stops. Stop Bell B '. As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop "BELL B" on the effective line, the symbol of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated should be in the range of 14th to 18th, or 19th to 3rd. For example, "bell B" can be stopped, and "bell B" can not be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "bell B" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL B" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "BELL B"-"BELL B"-"BELL B", and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", if "bell B" can not be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is made effective. Stop it ("PB = 1"). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
Also, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol pertaining to one winning combination with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1 It is possible to stop the symbols related to one piece with the probability of / 2 ". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to one piece, it is possible to always stop the pattern symbol. Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) at the time of winning the small winning combination B1,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (small part 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
It will be either.

Next, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the case of the first right stop will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is 2 if either “BELL A” or “BELL B” is stopped on the effective line Become the largest. For example, if "bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won. Since “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the right reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop “Bell A” or “Bell B” when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won at this time.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping the "bell A" or "bell C", which is a symbol related to the small part 03 or 19, on the effective line. Here, as in the above, priority is given to stopping the "bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with the probability of "1/2". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A" .
Furthermore, before the middle third stop, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", when "bel A" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell A '. As shown in FIG. 2, in order to stop "BELL A" on the effective line, if the symbol on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is within the range of No. 5 to 14, stop "BEL A" If it is in the other range, it can not stop "Bell A". Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "BELL A"-"BELL A"-"BELL A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", when "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry" Stop at the effective line ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped at the effective line.

In addition, it is assumed that “BELL B” is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be won at this time.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell B” or “Red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small winning combination 10 or 26, at the effective line. Here, priority is given to stopping "BELL B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B" .
Furthermore, before the middle third stop, in the case of "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", when "bel bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell B '. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell B" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL B" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "BELL B"-"BELL B"-"BELL B", and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", when "bell B" can not be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry" Stop at the effective line ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped at the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one winning combination with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1 It is possible to stop the symbols related to one piece with the probability of / 2 ". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to one piece, it is possible to always stop the pattern symbol. Therefore, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1 (pressing order incorrect answer),
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (small part 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
It will be either.
The winning rate and the stopping rate of the pattern symbol are the same as in the middle first stopping.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins with “PB = 1” at the time of the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct). On the other hand, in the middle or right first stop (pressing order incorrect answer), one winning combination is won with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol is stopped with a probability of "3/4". .

Even when the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1. The winning combination included when winning the small role B2,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 04: "Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle B" (1 sheet)
Small part 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 04. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, since “bell B” can be stopped when “red 7” can be stopped, “bell B” is stopped without stopping “red 7”. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 09. In addition, when "BELL A" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "CHERRY" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B2 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, since “bell B” can be stopped when “red 7” can be stopped, “bell B” is stopped without stopping “red 7”. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell B" can be stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 09. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" can be stopped when the "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 04. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B2, when the pressing order is incorrect,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle B" (small part 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small part 09)
It will be either.

Even when the small winning combination B3 is won, the small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1. The winning combination included when winning the small role B3 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 05: "Belle A"-"Belle B"-"Belle A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Minor part 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, the “bell B” is stopped without stopping the “red 7” as described above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes winning of the small role 08. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C" as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 05. In addition, when "BELL A" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "CHERRY" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B2 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", the "bell B" is stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 05. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped similarly to the above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", the "bell A" is stopped when the "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes winning of the small role 08. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B3, when the pushing order incorrect answer,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle B"-"Belle A" (small part 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
It will be either.

Also when the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1 winning. The winning combination included when winning the small role B4 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the left stop. Stop "Bell B". In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 07. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 06. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B4 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the active line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, "bell B" is stopped similarly to the above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" is stopped when "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 07. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", the "bell B" is stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 06. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B4, when the pressing order is incorrect,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small part 07)
It will be either.

In the following, the detailed description of the small role B5 table to the small role B12 table at the time of winning the small portions B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small combination B5 table used when winning the small combination B5, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 03 or small at the probability of "1/4" The part 10 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
In the small combination B6 table used when winning the small combination B6, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the press order correct time, and the combination of the small combination with the probability of “1/4” indicates the small combination 04 Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small combination B7 table used when winning the small combination B7, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with the probability of "1/4" at the pressing order incorrect solution 05 or small part 08 wins, the pattern design stops with probability of 3/4. That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Furthermore, in the small combination B8 table used when winning the small combination B8, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop during the middle order which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with a probability of “1/4” at the pressing order incorrect solution 06 Alternatively, the minor player 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

In the small combination B9 table used when winning the small combination B9, the small combination 01 wins at the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 03 or small at the probability of "1/4" The part 10 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small combination B10 table used when winning the small combination B10, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and when the pressing order is incorrect the small combination 04 with a probability of "1/4" Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small combination B11 table used when winning the small combination B11, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with the probability of "1/4" 05 or small part 08 wins, the pattern design stops with probability of 3/4. That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Furthermore, in the small combination B12 table used when winning the small combination B12, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop, which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 01 with a probability of "1/4" Alternatively, the minor player 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

  As is apparent from the above, when the small winning combination B is selected, the winning combination in which the winning combination is incorrect, the single winning combination that can be won is the low winning combination 03 to the low winning combination 10. Therefore, the small winning combination other than the above included in each condition device does not win. What is set in this way relates to a one-piece combination that can be won when a small combination C-group winning, which will be described later, is won.

  The small combination C1 table is used in the game when the small combination C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 02 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct) Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the one-piece combination (one of the small combinations 03 to 10 when the small combination C1 is elected) included in the winning combination is stopped at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  At the time of pressing correct when winning the small winning combination C1 (same small winning combination C2 and C3 to be described later), as in the small winning combination B group winning, to win the small winning combination 02 (three-piece winning combination) by number priority Control. The combination of the symbols corresponding to the small part 02 is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"watermelon" as shown in FIG. 4 and "PB = 1" in all reels 31. . Therefore, the small winning combination 02 can always be won when the pushing order is correct.

  Further, at the time of winning the small winning combination C1 (in the middle or at the first right stop), control is made to win one winning combination (small winning combination 03 to 10) by number priority. Here, as shown in FIG. 5, the combination of symbols of the small part 03 to 10 is a combination of symbols of “bell A” or “bell B” for each reel 31. Furthermore, in any reel 31 among combinations of symbols of small part 03-10, "Bell A" is four, "Bell B" is four, and either "Bell A" or "Bell B" Even if stopped, the condition of number priority is met. In particular, at the time of winning the small combination C2 and the small combination C3, although including the small combination 21 and the small combination 22 respectively, even if these small combination is included in the winning combination, there is no change in the type of symbol priority. Moreover, in all the reels 31, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition. Therefore, it is always possible to win one of the small winning combinations 03-10.

  From the above, at the time of winning the small winning combination C1, the small winning combination 02 (three winning combinations) wins ("PB = 1") when the pressing order is correct, and any of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 when the pressing order is incorrect (1 The winning combination ("PB = 1") is not won, and a drop-off (stopping of the pattern pattern) does not occur as in the case of winning the small winning combination B group.

  The same table as the small combination C1 table is also applied to the small combination C2 table and the small combination C3 table respectively used when the small combination C2 is elected and the small combination C3 is elected. As shown in FIG. 13, when the small winning combination C2 is won, the middle first stop becomes the correct pressing order, and when the small winning combination C3 is won, the right first first stopping is the correct pressing order. The stop control for winning the small role 02 or the small roles 03 to 10 is the same as when the small role C1 is won, so the explanation will be omitted.

  Therefore, the one-piece combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped at the wrong order in the winning combination of the small combination B group win (one small combination 03-10), and the one combination that can be stopped at the depression sequence of the small combination C group win ( Small roles 03-10) become the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine which of the small combination B group or the small combination C group was won in the game just by looking at the small combination winnings of the small combination 03-10.

  The small combination D table is used in the game when the small combination D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small combination 35 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small role D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. The combination of symbols of the small part 35 is "watermelon" as shown in FIG. The “watermelon” is arranged at “PB ≠ 1” for the left and middle reels 31 and is arranged at “PB = 1” for the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small part D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops on the effective line, the "watermelon" stops on the effective line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, and the small role 35 is dropped.

  The small winning combination E1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 13, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, it becomes so-called stop form of middle cherry (so that "cherry" stops at middle left) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

  It should be noted that the winning of the small combination E1 includes the small combinations 36 and 38 (and further includes the small combination 37 at the time of the small combination E2 winning described later), but since these small combinations both have two pieces, The above-mentioned number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by any predetermined stop control. Therefore, control is made to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 36 at the left or middle first stop, and control is given to give priority to the winning combination of the small winning combination 38 at the right first stop.

  In FIG. 2, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is the third, the eighth, and the thirteenth (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left, "Blank" or "Red 7" stops in the effective line which is the lower left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol relating to the small winning combination 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the 7th "Red 7" is stopped at the lower left stage at the first left stop ("Cherry" stop in the middle left), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, one of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7” or “Blank” (4 symbols totaling “PB =” Stop 1)) on the active line. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 36.
Also, when the second reel or the 12th “blank” is stopped at the lower left stage when the left reel 31 stops (the “cherry” stops at the middle left stage), “when the middle reel 31 stops” in the same manner as above. "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "black 7", "blue 7", "red 7" or "blank" is stopped on the effective line . As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 36.

The stop control is performed in the same manner as described above for the middle first stop. Therefore, the symbols relating to the small winning combination 36 stop at "PB = 1" for the middle and right reels 31, and there are cases where the "red 7" or "blank" stops for the left reel 31 and when it does not stop "PB ≠ 1").
However, when it is not possible to stop “red 7” or “blank” in the lower left stage at the left or middle first stop, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped. The “bell A” or “bell B” can be stopped at “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank", and the small winning combination 38 is won.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, priority is given to winning of the small winning combination 38 at the time of the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" stops, and the minor player 38 wins with "PB = 1". .
Furthermore, at the time of the first right stop, even if "Cherry" can be stopped at the left middle level when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell" at the lower left level without stopping "Cherry" in the left middle level. B "(in this case," Cherry "non-stop in the left middle) is stopped.

The small combination E2 table is used in the game when the small combination E1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 36 or 38 (or the small combination 37) is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 The stop position of the
Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stopping position determination table.

  Alternatively, in the case of the left first stop, “Replay” is made effective for the middle reel 31 only when “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped in the lower left stage (at the middle stage cherry stop). It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7” or “blank” may be stopped for the right reel 31. As a result, the minor player 37 wins. Temporarily, if it carries out stop control in this way, it will become stop control which can distinguish whether it is at the time of small winning combination E1 at the middle stage cherry stop, or it is at the small winning combination E2 winning time.

The small part F table is used in the game when the small part F is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so that any one of the small parts 01 to 39 can be stopped on the effective line. It was decided.
In the present embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
Further, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small winning combination F table performs stop control with priority to the number of sheets. In this way, the small role 39 is always awarded. In addition, in the left reel 31, since it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by 2 symbol totals of "Cherry" or "Bell C", the small winning combination 39 wins by "PB = 1."

  The small part G table is used in the game when the small part G is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small part 40 on the activated line. . The small winning combination 40 is a combination of symbols arranged in “PB = 1” for all the reels 31. Therefore, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when playing a game when the item condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone), or when 1BBA is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and stop control of the reel 31 In the range of, while stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA on the effective line, and not stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBA on the effective line, determine the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped It is
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all reels 31 (PB) 1), "Red 7" can not be stopped on the effective line unless the eye is pushed.

Similarly, the 1 BBB table is used when the character condition condition device number “2” is won (1 BBB alone), or the 1 BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the reel 31 In the range of stop control of, while stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to 1 BBB on the effective line, and not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1 BBB on the effective line, The combination is defined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” can not be stopped at the effective line unless the eyes are pushed.

  In addition, although the detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small winning combination or replay are won twice or in the game in which 1BB is won before the previous game and the small winning combination or replay in this game is won, the following stop control Can be mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping symbols on both the winning 1BB and small winning combination or replay on the effective line, and when it is not possible to stop both symbols on the effective line, the winning small The stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of a role or a replay on an effective line is mentioned. In addition, the stop control to stop the symbols of both 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay on the effective line is up to the second stopping, and at the third stopping, it is controlled to win 1BB or the small winning combination or the replay The role of is not a duplicate prize.
Second, priority is given to stopping the winning 1BB and symbols for both the small part and the replay on the active line, and when it is not possible to stop both symbols on the active line, the winning 1BB There is a stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol of the effective line.

  Furthermore, thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, when stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, additionally, When it is possible to simultaneously stop the winning 1BB symbol on the activated line, stop control may be made to stop at that position.

  When 1BB ("PB ≠ 1") and a small combination or replay of "PB = 1" are won twice (when they are simultaneously selected), the symbol of 1BB won and the combination or small combination or replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop both of the symbol and the effective line, and it is also possible to control to stop only the symbol of "PB = 1" or the symbol of the replay on the effective line. Therefore, since the small roles E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small roles E1 and E2 are respectively selected when the 1BBA and the small role E1 of this embodiment are double-wined, and when the 1BBB and the small role E2-double-wins. It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of the reel 31 stopped at the effective line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the activated line by detecting, for example, the angle at which the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations by the prize determination unit 66, and when the combination of the combinations is achieved A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player according to the winning combination, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, control is performed such that the number of medals inserted in the game this time is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the transition condition of RT is satisfied when stopping all reels 31 for each game, and controls to perform the transition of RT when it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied. It is a thing.
As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA actuation (1BBA gaming), 1BBB actuation (1BBB gaming). And, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the types (numbers) of the conditional devices to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different for each RT.

  In this embodiment, the transition timing of RT is set at the time of the stop display of the combination of symbols or the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, the complete stop (at the stop of all the reels 31). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbol is stopped when all reels 31 are stopped during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 when all the reels 31 stop. The transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be made based on the winning of 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game winning 1BB. It is also good. In the present embodiment, the process shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game winning 1BB.

The non-internal medium game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2 and RT3. In addition, inside during the game, corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section and AT, control is basically made to stay at RT 3 as control of the slot machine 10 side, but when a player's push switch mistake of the stop switch 42 or the like occurs, stay at RT 2 In some cases. In the case of the advantageous section ending with only one instruction function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group), it is not necessary to make it stay at RT3. That is, in the RT2, one command function operation game (excluding the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed to end the advantageous section. Of course, during the advantageous section, the user may basically stay at RT3. In addition, during the advantageous section and the non-AT, in principle, the user may be made to stay at RT3, or may be made to stay at a specific RT, and the staying RT may not be limited.

  Note that transition to a specific RT (for example, RT3) may be possible based on satisfaction of the transition condition of the advantageous segment, and transition to a predetermined RT (for example, non-RT) based on satisfaction of the termination condition of the advantageous segment It may be possible. In such a configuration, the transition condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and when transitioning to the inside from the next game, the transition to the internal RT (for example, RT4) is made instead of a specific RT. Good. If the advantageous section continues even after the bonus ends, RT after the bonus ends may be set to RT3.

In the non-RT, non-internal middle game of RT1 to RT3, the lottery of the article condition device is performed. When the player wins 1BB in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, when 1BB wins the game which is won by 1BB, in order to start the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB when the game is completely stopped this time, RT4 (internal game) is not passed in this case.

RT 4 is continued until the winning 1 BB wins. When it is determined that 1 BBA or 1 BBB has won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to 1 BBA operation (1 BBA gaming) or 1 BBB operation (1 BBB gaming), respectively.
Once the 1 BBA is in operation, the operation is continued until the 1 BBA operation termination condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the operation termination condition of 1BBA is set to the fact that the number of dispensed sheets exceeds 150 sheets.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game, 1 BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the termination condition of the 1 BBA operation It is judged that it will satisfy, and it controls to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation as described above. If transition is made during 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the 1BBB operation termination condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1 BBB operation is set to the payout of more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not each game has been paid out more than 200 medals, and when it is determined that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it determines that the 1 BBB operation end condition is satisfied, From the next game, control to shift to RT1.

  Replay is not included in the counts of 150 or 200 during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 14, during the 1BB operation, there is a case in which Replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of Replay winning is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, as the replay D is won, the number of games during the 1BB operation increases. Particularly in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, since the winning probability of replay D during 1BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1BBB operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1BBA operation is 1BBB operation It will be more than the expected value of the number of games played.

During operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, continuous operation of RB is performed. The RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 15, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small winning combination E 36 is won and the small winning combination E 2 is won, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games for setting 6 to reach the end condition (that exceeds 150 sheets) during 1 BBA operation is greater than that for setting 1. Therefore, during the 1 BBA operation in the advantageous section, the expectation value for winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so the probability that the advantageous section is added becomes high. Details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  At the time of initialization of RWM53, the game starts from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while carrying over the 1BB winning, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In the non-RT mode, the RT control means 68 continues the non-RT mode until the pattern pattern is displayed. In the non-RT, a small winning combination B group is drawn, and one of the small winning combination B groups is won, and when the small winning combination is dropped, a pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT mode, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, as in non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern pattern is displayed. And if a pattern figure is displayed in RT1, it will transfer to RT2.

RT2 is an RT in which the staying rate is highest in the normal section. At RT2, when Replay B is won and Replay 02 is won, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the Replay C group is won, and Replay 03 continues until it is won. When the pattern symbol is displayed or the Replay 03 wins in RT3, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and in the non-inside), the RT2 and RT3 are generally moved back and forth, but the RT2 stay rate is the highest in probability. When one BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the transition from the next game to RT4 (inside) is as described above.

  In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT3, in order to maintain RT3 (in principle, it is decided to be RT3). In the case of staying), the instruction function is activated when the Replay C group is won, and the correct pressing order for winning Replay 01 is displayed. This prevents a fall to RT2. Further, when the small winning combination B is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by operating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by operating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer for winning Replay 02 by activating the indication function at the time of Replay B group winning while activating the indication function as described above Display the push order and control to shift to RT3 (when staying at RT3 as a rule during the advantageous section).
In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but the indication function until the pattern pattern is displayed In the operable game (for example, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group), do not operate the instruction function, and wait until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the indication function is operated in the same manner as described above (in principle, when staying in RT3 during the advantageous section).

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of the indication function, etc. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
Further, the advantageous segment control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous segment in the advantageous segment and the non-internal middle game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is simultaneously selected as the advantageous section when a specific condition device is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61. Decide to migrate. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to not being inside, and it is not decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section inside.

Further, as described above, in the case of determining the transition to the advantageous section in accordance with the combination lottery result (condition device that has won), it is not possible to make the condition of winning of the condition device having a setting difference.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, there is a case where the normal section shifts to the advantageous section on condition that the condition apparatus common to the setting wins.

  As shown in FIG. 14, for example, when a single BBA is won, there are cases where it is decided to shift to an advantageous section and cases where it is not decided to shift. When the random number value included in the range of “20” is extracted out of “30” of the numbers allocated to single winning of 1 BBA, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the number “10” When the random value included in the range of is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. The same applies to the single winning of “1BBA + small role D”, “1BBA + small role E1”, and small portion E1.

  In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added on each case. It should be noted that it is possible to perform an additional drawing lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section when winning in these condition devices, or to draw a lottery whether or not to perform an additional drawing lottery. However, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the addition of the advantageous section is uniformly performed.

When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games of the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the termination condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, the termination conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of differences, the number of wins of the small winning combination B group, the number of operations of the instruction function, etc.) may be determined. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to an advantageous section in which the end condition is set as follows.
Specifically, for example, the following may be defined.
1BBA single winning case (place number "20"): Initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and it shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games 1BBA + small combination D duplicate winning case (place number "5"): initial value is 1BB After the end of the game count to shift to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small combination E1 when double winning combination (place number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of the 1BB game and shift to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When combination D single winning (place number "50"): The advantageous section of the initial value 150 games small combination E1 when alone winning (place number "250"): the advantage section of the initial value 100 games, or one small role Of the advantageous sections ending with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (it may be determined by the lottery, or included in the range of the number “120” of the number “250” Initial value is 10 when the When the random number value included in the range of “130” is extracted as an advantageous section of 0 game, it may be an advantageous section ending with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning one small winning combination B group)

In addition, since the winning probability of the small winning combination D is lower than the winning probability of the small winning combination E1, in order to give a feeling of premiere when winning the small winning combination D, the number of games in the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination D is small It is set more than at the time of winning combination E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 may be set to be larger than that at the time of winning the small winning combination D.
In addition, even when the condition device shown in FIG. 14 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA alone is elected, the number of games in the advantageous section is increased by “30”, and the small combination E1 alone is won (place “250” Is determined by adding "50" to the number of games, "20" by adding the number of games when the small combination E1 alone is won (number "750"), and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, in the normal section, when the small winning combination E1 alone is won, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “1⁄4” (“250” among all “1000”). Do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 is set higher for setting 6 than for setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle-stage cherries, but the probability that it is determined that the middle-stage cherry appears to shift to the advantageous section is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference.
Note that, contrary to the present embodiment, setting 1 may be set higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the appearance probability of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability determined to shift to the advantageous section at the middle cherry appearance.
Further, during the advantageous section, when the small combination E1 alone is won, it is always added to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 alone in the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle-stage cherries, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle-stage cherries appear is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference.

In addition, 1 BBA is a special combination (except when 1 BBA and a small combination D are double-wined) common to set winning combinations, and 1 BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in winning combinations.
In this case, when the 1BBA is selected during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is activated, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when it wins 1 BBB which has a setting difference in an advantageous section, and it becomes in operation of 1 BBB, it is defined that it is not possible to add an advantageous section during operation of 1 BBB. It is defined that when 1BBA and minor player D having a set difference in the advantageous section are dually elected and 1BBA is in operation, it is not possible to add the advantageous section while 1BBA is in operation.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during operation of 1 BBA, the winning probability of the small winning combination A is lower in setting 6 than in setting 1, and the winning probability of small winning combination E 2 is set in setting 6 Higher than. Therefore, since the operation termination condition of the 1BBA is set to a payout exceeding 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if it is set to add the advantageous section when Replay D is won, the expected value of the number of times to win Replay D during 1 BBA operation is higher in Setting 6 than in Setting 1, so the higher the setting, the better. The advantageous section can be easily added.

Furthermore, during 1 BBA operation, when the number of times of playing reaches a predetermined number of times, it may be set to perform the addition of the advantageous section.
As described above, during the 1 BBA operation, the setting 6 has a larger expected value of the number of games played during the 1 BBA operation than the setting 1.
As described above, the operation termination condition of the 1BBA is set to the fact that there is a payout exceeding 150 sheets. On the other hand, the expected payout number per game during the 1 BBA operation is about “8.664” in setting 1 and about “8.557” in setting 6. Accordingly, the expected value of the number of games for which the number of payouts reaches 150 is approximately “17.3” in setting 1 and approximately “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, if the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, it is decided that the advantage section is unconditionally added, the higher the set value, the easier the advantage section is added be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1 BBA operation, it may be set to perform the addition of the advantageous section each time a certain number of games have passed. Also in this case, the higher the set value, the easier the addition of the advantageous section can be performed.

On the other hand, since 1 BBB is a special part having a set difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during 1 BBB operation.
In addition, after 1 BBA operation ends, it moves to non RT, when it moves to non RT, it stays in non RT until pattern pattern is indicated, when pattern symbol is indicated, moves to RT2. That is, RT1 is not passed after the end of the operation of 1BBA.

  On the other hand, after 1 BBB operation ends, it shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until the pattern pattern is displayed. At RT1, a replay E is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 14, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after completion of the 1 BBB operation, the probability of being added to the advantageous section becomes higher than after the completion of the 1 BBA operation. Then, by setting the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of Replay E winning to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance between after the end of the 1 BBA operation and after the end of the 1 BBB operation.

  Then, when maintaining the advantageous section and shifting to RT1, the pattern function is not activated in the game capable of operating the instruction function (for example, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group) until the pattern pattern is displayed, the pattern pattern Wait until is displayed. Then, the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the indication function is operated. When the transition to RT1 with maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 wins (unless there is a push order mistake) pattern The symbol is never displayed. For this reason, when transitioning to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to keep staying at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. The indication function is activated when the small winning combination B is won, not until the end of the advantageous section, but after the predetermined number of games, the indication function can be operated until the pattern symbol is displayed. For example, in the case of winning the small winning combination B (group B), the instruction function may not be activated, and the process may wait until the pattern symbol is displayed.

In addition, when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 turns on the advantageous section display LED (not shown in FIG. 1) by the time the predetermined timing comes. Control is performed, and when it is other than the advantageous section (normal section or standby section), control is performed to turn off the advantageous section display LED.
First, when it is determined that the advantageous section control means 69 shifts to the advantageous section, after the end of the game determined to shift to the advantageous section (all reels 31 are stopped, and when there is a payout, the medal is Until the next game medal insertion (bet) after payout is possible, and when it has stored medals, until it becomes possible to operate the settlement switch 46 (settlement processing operation), so as to light the advantageous section display LED Control.

Also, secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB capable of carrying over the winning information after the next game, until the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped, Control to turn on the advantageous zone display LED.
Therefore, if it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part, for example, the special part carries over the winning information to the next game like 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED may be turned on until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is stopped (only in the case where a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, when the special part is effective only in the game in which the special part has been won like SB, CB, and it is a special part that does not carry over the winning information to the next game, It is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (bet) is possible and the operation of the settlement switch 46 is possible, as in the case of deciding the transition to the advantageous section based on that. is there.

  Further, in the game in which the instruction function is to be operated in the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 displays the number of wins by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub control board 80 described later. The pressing order information is displayed on the LED 78. For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won, pushing order instruction information corresponding to the pushing order instruction number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to the “operation of the indication function” in the present embodiment.

It is a game that can activate the pointing function during the advantageous section,
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small winning combination C is won (when the small winning combination B is won, there is no operation of the instruction function since the pattern symbol is desired to be displayed)
2) RT2: Replay B group winning, Small winning combination B winning, and Small winning combination C winning 3) RT3: Replay C winning combination, Small winning combination B winning, and Small winning combination C winning .

  In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission unit 70 transmits an external signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100. This external signal is a signal indicating the start and end of the advantageous section, the start and end of the AT, and the start and end of the 1BB operation.

The control command transmission unit 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control substrate 80 to the sub control substrate 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. For example, the first control command may be set to data indicating the type of control command, and the second control command may be set to data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. Further, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, it becomes “00000001 (B)” in the present embodiment. Therefore, 2-byte data combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually) is a control command of RT. As, the main control board 50 is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only for the instruction function operation game), the effect group number, and the item condition device number, the first control command is type data, and the second control command is all It is data stored in the RWM 53.

  The control command transmission unit 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub control board 80. For example, when the pushing order bell is won, there is a possibility that the wrong pushing order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device number due to the injustice. On the other hand, the item condition device number has no risk of such fraudulent acts as described above. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA has been won, an item condition device number "1" is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 is based on the control commands transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, the control commands such as the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the item condition device number. , And at what timing (when the start switch 41 is operated or when each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), what effect is to be output (how the lamp 21 is turned on, blinks or is extinguished), the speaker 22 The specific effect contents such as what kind of sound is to be output and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23 are determined by lottery.

  And the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display apparatus 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation and during the advantageous section, the number of games acquired, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games) and the like are displayed as images. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when winning a small winning combination B1 in the game during the advantageous section and receiving the control command corresponding to the push order instruction number, the correct push order "left first stop" or "1- ○-○" As in the above, the user is notified of the contents that the player can easily know the correct pressing order.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device has actually been won, but includes rough win information. For example, when receiving a control command corresponding to the effect group number indicating that one of the small combination A, small combination B, or small combination C has been won, the small combination A, small combination B, or small combination The sub control board 80 can not know which of the group C is won. However, it is possible to know whether the player has won the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying a symbol of "bell" or lighting a frame lamp with "yellow" that is a corresponding color of "bell".

Subsequently, the LED of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 16 is a plan view showing the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79 in more detail.
Further, in FIG. 16, a display substrate 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 3) is disposed in the slot machine 10 below the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, and the status display LED 79.

The storage number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying the lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, in particular, is configured of a seven segment display (seven segment display unit, so-called 7 segments).
As shown in FIG. 16, although the number of digits mounted on the display substrate 75 is four of the digits 1 to 4, in the present embodiment, the number of digits is five, and the other digit 5 is the main This corresponds to the setting value display LED 73 (FIG. 1) provided on the control board 50.

The storage number display LED 76 displays the number of medals stored, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, when no medals are betted and stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “00”. In this case, the display is not limited to “00”, and may be “* 0” or “**” (here, “*” indicates extinguishing).
Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the bet limit is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is three, the medal is bet and is not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored in the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In the present embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, temporarily, when the medals are treated from the medal insertion slot 43, the medals that have been kept by the blocker 45 are returned from the payout slot.

  Here, when a combination with a medal payout (except for replay) is won and medals corresponding to that combination are paid out, priority is given to the inside of the slot machine 10 over the actual payout of medals from the payout opening. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the number of stored sheets before the winning combination is “10”, when the nine-piece winning combination is won, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the number of stored sheets exceeds "50" at the time of winning the winning combination, the amount exceeding "50" is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of stored pieces is “47” before winning a winning combination, and nine medals are paid out by winning a combination of 9 winnings, 3 pieces are stored, the number of stored pieces becomes “50”, and “50” is exceeded. About six pieces are paid out from the payout opening.

  Furthermore, at the time of winning a replay, storage and payout of medals are not performed, and the number of medals betted in the game is automatically betted for replay. For example, when the player plays the game with 3 bets (3 sheets) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically betted. And, since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of the medal for performing the re-game, the medal can not be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter.

  In the "rules related to the authorization of the gaming machine and the verification of the type etc.", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay has stopped on the effective line, it is not the "winning" that is the operation of the condition device pertaining to replay It is being interpreted. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), Replay is also treated as one of the roles (Replay Role), and the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to Replay has stopped on the effective line is referred to as "Replay win".

Further, the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of players who have won) at the time of winning of the winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying the lower digit. There is. Therefore, similarly to the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays 2 digits.
When there are no medals to be paid out, the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is "00". However, for example, when nine medals are paid out and nine medals are paid out, the display of the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquisition number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Moreover, although the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs.
Furthermore, the number-of-gains display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying push order instruction information in the instruction function operation game. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that also serves as the display of the acquisition number, the error content, and the push order instruction information. The notification of the advantageous push order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control board 80.
Further, although not shown in FIG. 16, digits 1 to 4 are 7-segment displays with dots (DP; decimal point), digit 2 (lower digit of storage number display LED 76) or digit 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) It is also possible to use the dot of) as the above-mentioned advantageous zone display LED.

In FIG. 16, the status display LED 79 is composed of seven LEDs 79a to 79g.
The 1 bet, 2 bet, and 3 bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals betted, respectively, and when 1 medal is bet, the 1 bet display LED 79a lights up and 2 When the medal is bet, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b light. Furthermore, when three medals are betted, the 1-bet display LED 79a, the 2-bet display LED 79b, and the 3-bet display LED 79c light.

The game start LED 79 d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, when the medal is not bet (or the replay is not automatically inserted), it does not light.
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when it is possible to insert a medal. In other words, it lights up before the game is over and the medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In the present embodiment, even when the replay is activated, even when the bet can be made according to the number of stored sheets (for example, when the number of stored sheets is less than “50”), it lights up.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up when a replay is won, and a predetermined timing after the replay is won (for example, before an automatic bet based on a replay win is performed, or an automatic bet based on a replay win is performed After that, the replay display LED 79f lights up to inform the player that the player is in an automatic bet state.
In the present embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is an LED that lights up during the settlement process. When the settlement switch 46 is turned on with stored medals and / or bet medals (except for the automatic bet at the time of replay winning), it lights up while medals are actually being paid out.

FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining the details of the digit and the segment.
Each digit is composed of segments A to P (eight in total), and segments A to G (seven) of them constitute so-called seven segments. Furthermore, the segment P constitutes any one of the status display LEDs 79 (except for the digit 2).
As shown in FIG. 17, for example, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes a game start LED 79d. In addition, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes an input display LED 79e. Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 4 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the digits 1 to 5 are dynamically lit each time the interrupt processing is performed. For example, in an interrupt process, only digit 1 can be turned on, and digits 2 to 5 are turned off. Then, in the next interrupt processing, only the digit 2 can be turned on, and the digits 1, 3 to 5 are turned off. Therefore, each digit can be lighted at a rate of once every five interrupts.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 19 and 20 are diagrams showing output ports 0 to 3 and 4 to 7 provided on the main control board 60. FIG. Although the slot machine 10 is actually provided with other input ports and output ports, they are not shown because they are not directly related to the present embodiment.
The input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 7 in this embodiment are 1-byte ports to which 8 bits of D0 to D7 can be input or output. The other input ports and output ports not shown are also 1-byte ports capable of outputting 8-bit data D0 to D7.

  Further, in FIGS. 18 to 20, ports indicated as unused are not actually used, or mean input / output ports of signals which will not be described in the present embodiment (ports without input / output of signals Does not mean all unused).

  In FIG. 18, the input port 0 receives respective signals of the settlement switch 46 which is an operation switch, the bet switch 40 (1 bet switch 40a and 3 bet switch 40b), the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. In the example of FIG. 18, the 1 bet switch signal (D1 bit) and the 3 bet switch signal (D2 bit) are divided, but in the case of the slot machine 10 of the specification in which only the 3 bet switch 40 is provided, The D1 bit of input port 0 is not used.

Further, to the input port 1, respective signals of the passage sensor 43a, the door switch 15, the setting switch 13, the setting key switch 12, the reset switch 14, and the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 33 are input.
Furthermore, in the input port 2, a power interruption signal (a signal output when a power interruption occurs), signals of the closing sensors 1 (44a) and 2 (44b), payout sensors 1 (37a) and 2 (37b) Signal is input.

  And, as will be described later, a main process (also referred to as a main loop) to be performed once per game is provided as information processing for proceeding with the game. In the main processing, detection of inserted medals, winning processing after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the like are performed. The program start process (FIG. 32) and the power recovery process (FIG. 33), which will be described later, may also be referred to as main process.

  During the main process, the main process is left once, and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) described later is executed. Then, in the interrupt processing, processing etc. for detecting the input ports 0 to 2 is executed, and after execution of these processings, processing to return to the main processing is periodically performed again. The interval of the interruption time is 2.235 ms in the present embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt processing of 2.235 ms interval.

  Then, based on the acquired data, level data (data indicating on / off of each bit) and rising data of the input port (previous interrupt is off, current interrupt is on) for each of the input ports 0 to 2 Data indicating which bit the data has become) and falling data of the input port (data indicating which bit is on when the previous interrupt was on and the current interrupt was off) And remember. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

Also, regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed, all the D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected. For example, during rotation of the reel 31 (before the stop switch 42 is operated), since the player can not operate the bet switch 40 by the player, data of D1 and D2 bits of the input port 0 are necessarily acquired Although not necessary, in the present invention, data of all bits are acquired. Then, if all bits of data are obtained, it is also possible to make an error determination. For example, there is a case where the rising data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating.
Also, for example, if 1-byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0 is acquired, it is possible to know the on / off status of all the operation switches.

  In FIG. 19, at the output port 0, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits. The motor 32 of the present embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2 phase excitation, and is configured to drive the reel 31 by a combination of four phases of φ0 to φ3. Are output from predetermined bits.

Also, the signal of the blocker 45 is output from the D6 bit. Furthermore, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, the blocker 45 forms a medal passage connecting the medal insertion slot 43 and the hopper 35 when the blocker signal is “1” (on), and when it is “0” (off), A passage (return passage) connecting the medal insertion slot 43 and the payout opening is formed.
Then, for example, when driving the blocker 45, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 0 by interrupt processing.

The φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 1. Similarly, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 are output from the D4 to D7 bits.
Further, from the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2, a signal for lighting 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 2 bet display LED 79c is outputted in the status display LED 79, respectively. Furthermore, digit 1 to digit 5 signals are output from the D3 to D7 bits, respectively. These digit signals are signals for turning on / off the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the state display LED 79, and the setting value display LED 73.

Further, segment A signal to segment P signal are output from D0 to D7 bits of the output port 3, respectively. These segment signals are signals for lighting each segment (element) shown in FIG.
Specifically describing the digit signal and the segment signal, for example, when the data of the output port 2 is "10000000 (B)", only the digit 5 is turned on, so only the setting value display LED 73 is turned on. Furthermore, when the data of the output port 3 is “00111111 (B)”, the signals of the segments A to F are turned on (the signal of the segment G is turned off), so “0” is displayed on the digit 5.
As described above, D3 to D7 of output port 2 determine which digit is to be lighted, and which segment is to be lighted at output port 3.

In FIG. 20, an external (outer end) signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100 is output from the output port 4, and in the present embodiment, the external signals 1 to 5, a medal insertion signal, and a medal payout signal are output. .
Here, as described above, the “external signal” is a signal for outputting to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hole computer, data counter installed in the hole, etc.) via the external concentrated terminal plate 100. is there. In the present embodiment, the external signal 5 indicating that the door switch 15 of the slot machine 10 is on (the opening of the front door), the external signal 4 indicating that an error or a power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, etc. External signals 1 to 3 are provided to indicate start and end, start and end of AT, 1BB start and end. Note that how to determine the external signals 1 to 3 is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to define the external signal 1 as a signal at the time of staying at a specific RT.
Furthermore, the medal bet signal is output from the D6 bit, and the medal payout signal is output from the D7 bit.

The output ports 5 and 6 are ports for outputting a sub control data signal (a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80). The output port 5 outputs the sub control data signals 1 to 8 and the output port 6 outputs the sub control data signals 9 to 16.
Further, the output port 7 is set as a port for transmitting a test signal to the tester. Here, the “test signal” refers to a connection between the slot machine 10 (game machine) and a test machine, and the slot machine 10 transmits a predetermined signal to the test machine, so that the slot machine 10 This is a signal that is used to confirm that it is designed in accordance with the “Rules on Accreditation of the Certification and Type of Verification, etc.”. The connection between the slot machine 10 and the tester is not limited to that directly connected, but may be connected via an interface board for relaying.

The condition devices 1 to 8 are assigned to the output port 7. Here, the “condition device” indicates a so-called winning number (kind of winning), and in the present embodiment, D6 and D7 bits indicate the presence or absence of bonus (special role) winning, and D0 to D5 bits indicate Indicates the type of winning. By using D0 to D5 bits, 64 types of winning patterns can be output. By outputting a signal from the output port 7, it is possible to inform the outside which condition device is on (which has been won) in the game.
It is desirable that electronic parts (ICs) for outputting a test signal from the output port 7 be unmounted when the slot machine 10 is installed in a game arcade (market). However, the slot machine 10 is installed in the game arcade in a state where a program for outputting a test signal from the output port 7 is stored in the ROM 54 mounted on the main control board 50. In other words, the slot machine 10 installed in the market is configured to execute the program processing for transmitting the test signal but not output the test signal by the program processing.

21 to 31 are diagrams showing the address (storage address) of data stored in the RWM 53 and the contents thereof. The data shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 are data to be used in the description of the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these data.
In FIG. 21, input port level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) of address “F008 (H)” is an area for storing level data of input port 0. For each interrupt processing, the input signal from the input port 0 is read, and after a predetermined operation is performed, the data is stored (updated) in the storage area.
The input port 0 rising data (_PT_IN0_UP) of the address “F009 (H)” is an area for storing rising data of the input port 0. It is calculated each time the input port 0 level data is updated, and the input port 0 rising data is also updated.
The “rising” is a signal indicating that the previous interruption time is off (“0”) and the current interruption time is on (“1”). Therefore, when the previous interruption time is on (“1”) and the current interruption time is also on (“1”), the rising data is “0”.

In FIG. 22, input port 1 level data (_PT_IN1_OLD) of address “F00A (H)” is an area for storing level data of input port 1. For each interrupt processing, the input signal from the input port 1 is read, and after a predetermined operation is performed, the data is stored (updated) in the storage area.
The input port 1 rising data (_PT_IN1_UP) of the address “F00B (H)” is an area for storing the rising data of the input port 1. It is calculated each time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the input port 1 rising data is also updated.

In FIG. 23, input port 1 falling data (_PT_IN1_DOWN) of the address “F00C (H)” is an area for storing falling data of the input port 1. It is calculated each time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the input port 1 falling data is also updated.
The “falling” is a signal indicating that the previous interrupt time is on (“1”) and the current interrupt time is off (“0”). Therefore, when the previous interrupt time is off (“0”) and the current interrupt time is off (“0”), the falling data is “0”.
The input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) of the address “F00D (H)” is an area for storing level data of the input port 2. After each interrupt processing, the input signal from the input port 2 is read and calculated as described above, and then data is updated.

In FIG. 24, the specific information flag (_FL_ERROR_INF) of the address "F00F (H)" is an area for storing data of the specific information flag. Here, in the present embodiment, the specific information flag is door switch information (D1), setting switch information (D2), setting key switch information (D3), reset switch information (D4), transmission bit at the time of power failure recovery (D6) It consists of).
Door switch (15) information (D1), setting switch (13) information (D2), setting key switch (12) information (D3), and reset switch (14) information (D4) are each of input port 1 level data Corresponds to the bit. Then, for example, when on of the door switch 15 is detected, the D1 bit of the input port 1 level data is turned on (“1”), and in addition, the D1 bit of the specific information flag is turned on (“1”). ). The same applies to the setting key switch information (D3) and the reset switch information (D4).

  Further, the “power recovery return transmission bit” of D6 bit is a flag that is turned on (“1”) until a predetermined time passes after detection of recovery from power loss. The specific information flag is included in one flag (within one byte data) in order to simultaneously determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of recovery from a power failure and the on / off state of the switch related to the above setting change. And stores these information. Therefore, if the specific information flag is accessed to determine the on / off state of each bit, it is possible to simultaneously determine whether the switch related to the setting change has been turned on / off and whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after recovery from power off. Become.

  The abnormal input flag (_FL_IN_ABNML) of the address "F010 (H)" is an area for storing data of the abnormal input flag. In the present embodiment, the data of D4 to D6 bits are respectively generated when the passage sensor 43a has a staying abnormality, when the insertion sensor 2 (44b) has an abnormality input, and when the payout sensor 37 has an abnormality input. Turns on.

  In FIG. 25, the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) of the address "F011 (H)" is an area for mainly storing a flag for controlling turning on / off of the status display LED 79. In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 reception state, and when the operation of the start switch 41 is received, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable (for example, the medal is bet and the state before the game starts) To “1”, and when it is impossible to accept the operation of the start switch 41 (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating), it is set to “0”.

The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is “1” when the blocker 45 is on and “0” when the blocker 45 is off. By determining the value of the D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state (on or off) the current blocker 45 is.
The D3 bit replay display LED (79f) is data that is set to “1” when replay is displayed and medals are automatically inserted as replay. When this data is "1", the replay display LED 79f of the above-mentioned status display LEDs 79 is lit. Also, it is data to be set to “0” when the game by the re-game is over. When this data is "0", the replay display LED 79f is turned off.

  The effect display LED (79 g) of D4 bit is data that is set to “1” when the settlement switch 46 is operated to settle bet medals and / or stored medals. When this data is "1", the effect display LED 79g of the above-mentioned state display LEDs 79 is turned on. Further, it is data to be set to “0” when the settlement of the medal, which is the object of settlement, is completed.

  In the present embodiment, for example, when the replay switch is operated in a situation where the bet medal is (“1” or more) and the storage medal is (“1” or more), the replay is not won, for example. The bet medals are targeted for settlement, and the effect display LED 79g is formed to light up when the settlement for the bet medals is executed, but it is formed so that bet medals and storage medals are settled for one time. If the bet medals or stored medals are counted, it is preferable that the bet medals be set to “1” (ie, the effect display LED 79 g is turned on). Note that, as described above, when a bet medal is included in an automatic bet process by replay, the bet medal is not counted. In other words, after the replay is won, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation in which the player has bet medals and does not have the storage medal, the medal settlement is not performed.

  The setting change impossible flag of D6 bit is data that becomes “0” when the setting change is possible, and becomes “1” otherwise. In the present embodiment, the data is set to “1” when the start switch 41 is operated and the game proceeds, and the data is set to “0” when medal acceptance for the next game is started. . At the time of setting change, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to, and when the setting change impossible flag is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change impossible flag is “1”, when it is judged as an unrecoverable error (for example, the update abnormality of the random number judged for each interrupt processing), the setting change is permitted, and the setting change is It is possible to cancel the non-returnable error based on this.

  The medal limit setting determination of the D7 bit is data in which the bet medal number is “1” when the bet medal number has reached the medal limit number (specified number), and is “0” when the bet medal number has not been reached. In the present embodiment, the limit number (specified number) is set to three during the normal game and two during the 1BB game. Therefore, for example, during the normal game, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, it is "0" because it has not reached the medal limit, and when it is 3, it has reached the medal limit. It will be "1".

  The bet number display LED data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address "F012 (H)" is an area for storing bet number display LED data, and 1 to 3 bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are allocated to bits D0 to D2, respectively. ing. For example, when only the D0 bit is "1", only the 1-bet display LED 79a is controlled to light. In addition, when the D1 and D2 bits are "1", the 1 bet display LED 79a and the 2 bet display LED 79b are controlled to light.

In FIG. 26, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F014 (H)” is an area for storing data of the operation status flag, and in this embodiment, D0 bit is replayed, D3 bit is 1BB, D4. RB is assigned to a bit.
For example, when the replay is won, the replay is activated, and the D0 bit is set to "1" when the gaming state is set (for example, when "Yes" is made in step S91 of FIG. 35 described later). . The D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the re-game ends.
In addition, when 1BBA or 1BBB wins, 1BB is activated and RB is activated, and when the gaming state is set (for example, step S88 in FIG. 35 described later), D3 bit and D4 bit It will be "1". When the end condition of 1BBA or 1BBB is satisfied, the D3 bit and the D4 bit become “0”.
Although not provided in the present embodiment, when 2BB or CB is provided, for example, allocation may be made to an empty bit of the operation state flag (for example, 2BB to D1 bit and CB to D2 bit).

The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) of the address "F015 (H)" is an area for storing the symbol combination display flag, and in the present embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D3 bit. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped (when winning), the D0 bit is set to "1". Then, this bit is changed from "1" to "0" when the start switch 41 of the next game is operated.
Also, although not provided in this embodiment, when 2BB, CB, (independently elected) RB is provided, for example, 2BB in D1 bit, CB in D2 bit, CB, D4 so as to correspond to the operation status flag. Assigning RB is mentioned.

In FIG. 27, the automatic bet (input) sheet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL) at the address "F06A (H)" is an area for storing automatic input sheet number data (data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of replay winning) In the present embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored.
The medal bet (input) number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the address “F06B (H)” is an area for storing data of the number of medal bets, and in the present embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is It is memorized.
The medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F06C (H)" is an area for storing medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, any one of the values "0" to "10" is stored. Ru. In the present embodiment, since the maximum payout number of medals in one game is 10, the maximum value of medal payout number data is “10”. However, for example, when a 15-sheet payout combination is provided, the medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

The medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) at the address "F06D (H)" is an area for storing medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, it is similar to the medal payout number data at the address "F06C (H)". , One of the values "0" to "10" is stored.
In the present embodiment, when the winning combination is determined, the values of both the medal payout number data of the address “F06C (H)” and the medal payout number data buffer of the address “F06D (H)” are updated. . At the time of this update, the same value is stored in both addresses. Then, the medal payout number data of the address “F06C (H)” is subtracted for each medal payout, and becomes “0” at the end of medal payout. On the other hand, the medal payout number data buffer of the address “F06D (H)” is maintained without updating the value depending on the medal payout. The stored value is maintained until the value is updated at the end of the next game.

  The medal payout number data buffer is provided to determine whether or not the small winning combination has been won during the 1BB game. For example, in the game of 1BB, RB operates continuously, but it is determined that two games or two small winnings are awarded as the termination condition of the RB. At this time, when judging the winning of two small winnings which is the termination condition of RB, it is necessary to judge whether the small winning has won. Here, when referring to the medal payout number data of the address "F06C (H)", even if the small winning combination is won, the payout is completed and "0" can be stored in the address. Although there is a gender, the address "F06D (H)" is provided so that it can be grasped that the small winning combination has occurred regardless of whether or not the payout has ended. In the present embodiment, although the medal payout number data is stored, “0” may be stored when the small winning combination does not win, and “1” may be stored when the small winning combination wins.

  The acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address "F06E (H)" is an area for storing acquired number data. When the small winning combination is won and the medals are paid out, the paid-out number is stored in the acquired number data. And based on this data, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled. For example, when the acquired sheet number data is "1", this data "1" is read, and "01" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, in the medal payout number data for the address "F06C (H)" described above, "9" is stored, for example, when nine winning combinations are won, and at the time of medal payout (including addition to the stored number), It is a counter that is decremented in accordance with the number of payouts, such as “9” → “8” → “7” →... → “0”.
On the other hand, the acquired number data of the address "F06E (H)" is, for example, "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "9" when nine winning combinations are won, It is a counter that is added according to the medal payout.
Therefore, the display by the acquisition number display LED 78 is performed using the acquired number data.

The storage number display data (_NB_CREDIT) at the address "F06F (H)" is an area for storing storage number display data, and data for displaying the storage number at that time on the storage number display LED 76 described above I remember.
Here, in the present embodiment, although the data itself is a hexadecimal value (H), a value obtained by converting the number of stored sheets into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the number of stored sheets to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F06F (H)”. Thereby, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address "F06F (H)" are used to display the lower digit ("9" in this example) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are The upper digit ("2" in this example) of the stored number is stored as data for displaying. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of stored sheets is “50”, the data value to be stored is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  And in this embodiment, the address of RWM53 which memorize | stores storage sheet number data itself is not provided, but the storage sheet number display data is provided as display data of storage number display LED76. However, the stored sheet number display data is the stored sheet number data itself.

  The medal bet (input) signal output count at the address "F 070 (H)" (also referred to as the medal bet (input) signal switch count) (_CT_MEDAL_IN) is a storage area for the medal bet (input) signal output count, "0" A value of "6" is stored. In this embodiment, the medal bet signal output number indicates the number of times the bet number of medals is output to the outside as a signal, and outputs the number of times the bet number is doubled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, since the maximum value of the bet number is “3”, the maximum value of the medal bet signal output frequency is “6”. For example, when outputting the bet number “3”, “On (first) → off (second) → on (third) → off (fourth) → on (fifth) → off (sixth)” Become.

  The medal payout signal output frequency (also referred to as medal payout signal switching frequency) (_CT_MEDAL_OUT) at the address “F071 (H)” is an area for storing data of the medal payout signal output frequency, “0” to “20”. The value of is stored. The medal payout signal output number indicates the number of times the medal payout number is output to the outside as a signal, and outputs the number of times the payout number is doubled. This point is the same as the above-mentioned medal bet signal output frequency. Therefore, in the present embodiment, since the maximum value of the payout number is “10”, the maximum value of the medal payout signal output frequency is “20”. As described above, when the maximum value of the payout number is set to, for example, "15", the maximum value of the medal payout signal output frequency is "30".

  In FIG. 28, the interrupt counters (_CT_INTR) at addresses “F081 (H)” and “F082 (H)” are areas for storing the interrupt counters. The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of “0” to “65535 (D)”, and the value is updated (“+1”) for each interrupt. In the present embodiment, “0” to “65535 (D)” are adopted as the value of the interrupt counter, so the 2-byte address “F081 (H)” (lower 8 bits) and “F082 (H)” Although the upper 8 bits are used, for example, in the case of adopting the range of “0” to “255 (D)”, only the 1-byte address “F081 (H)” is used.

The winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) at the address "F083 (H)" is an area for storing the winning and replay condition device numbers, and after the lottery for the conditional device is performed, the winner is made in this storage area. Values corresponding to the winning and replay condition device are stored. The values stored here are used for the selection of the stop position determination table used for the stop control of the reel 31, the advantageous section, the AT lottery (and the addition), the selection of the effect group number, and the like.
In this embodiment, a condition device which can carry over the winning information to the next game, the winnings (small part) and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30 (D)” which are the condition devices not carrying over the winning information to the next game. Item condition device numbers “1” and “2 (D)”. The storage area of the winning and replay condition device number of the address “F083 (H)” is a storage area of the condition device which does not carry over the winning information to the next game.

On the other hand, the character article condition apparatus number (_NB_CND_BNS) of the address "F040 (H)" is an area for storing the character article condition apparatus number capable of carrying over the winning information, and in this embodiment At the time, “0” is stored, “1” when 1 BBA is won and “2 (D)” is stored when 1 BB is won.
This value is also used for the selection of the stop position determination table used for the stop control of the reel 31, the advantageous section, the AT lottery (superimposed), the selection of the effect group number, and the like, as described above.
The above-mentioned conditional device number is also referred to as a winning number.

The push order instruction number (_NB_ORD_INF) of the address "F085 (H)" is an area for storing the push order instruction number. In the present embodiment, an advantageous push order is assigned to the player for each winning (winning and replay) condition device (including both cases where the player has and does not have the push order advantageous to the player). ), When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a push order instruction number corresponding to the winning condition device is acquired and stored in this address.
In addition, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied" is in the push order instruction state (in the case of an instruction function operation game). Therefore, in the push order instruction state, the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. However, in the push order instruction state, acquisition of the push order instruction number and storage in the RWM 53 are not executed.

The effect group number (_NB_ACT_GRP) of the address “F086 (H)” is an area for storing the effect group number. In this embodiment, when the lottery of the condition device is performed, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected and stored in this address.
The left reel symbol number (for passing position) (_NB_RL1_PASPIC) of the address “F08A (H)” is an area for storing symbol numbers passing through the middle row (see FIG. 3), and along with rotation of the reel 31. The data in this storage area is also updated each time the symbol number passing through the middle row is updated. For example, when the "bell B" of No. 10 in FIG. 2 is positioned at the middle of the left reel 31, "10 (D)" is stored in this storage area. The actual symbol numbers are stored in this storage area after the reel sensor 33 detects the rotation of the reel 31 (after the rotation speed of the reel 31 reaches a predetermined speed). Before the reel 31 is detected by the reel sensor 33, "FF (H)" is stored as an initial value.

  The left reel symbol number (for stop position) (_NB_RL1_STPPIC) of the address "F08B (H)" is an area for storing symbol numbers to be stopped in the middle. When the stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position is determined from the condition device winning in the game and the position of the reel 31, a symbol number to be stopped in the middle is stored in this storage area. Also, when the symbol number to be stopped is not determined yet, "FF (H)" is stored.

The middle reel symbol number (for passing position) of the address "F08C (H)" and the middle reel symbol number (for stop position) of "F08D (H)" are the address "F08A (H for the left reel 31) respectively. Symbols corresponding to the left reel symbol number (for passing position) and the left reel symbol number (for stopping position) of “F08B (H)” (for middle reel 31). The data stored in these storage areas are the same as the addresses "F08A (H)" and "F08B (H)" except that they are data for the middle reel 31.
Also, the right reel symbol number (for passing position) of the address "F08E (H)" and the right reel symbol number (for stop position) of "F08F (H)" are the address "F08A for the left reel 31 respectively. (H) corresponds to the left reel symbol number (for passing position) and the left reel symbol number (for the stop position) of "F08B (H)" (for the right reel 31). The data stored in these storage areas are the same as the addresses "F08A (H)" and "F08B (H)" except that they are data for the right reel 31.

  In FIG. 29, the winning and replay condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_N) of the address “F091 (H)” is an area for storing winning and replay condition device information. The data of this address is a storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the tester, which is generated based on the winning and replay condition device number of the address "F083 (H)". In the winning and replay condition device information, information is generated so that the D6 bit is always "1", and the D0 to D5 bits have values corresponding to the winning condition device ("0" in this embodiment). ~ "30 (D)" is stored. For example, when "00000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F083 (H)" (when replay A is won in this embodiment), "01000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F091 (H)". It will be stored. Also, when "00000000 (B)" is stored in the address "F083 (H)" (when the condition device number "0" is won, that is, when not elected), the address "F091 (H)" is " 01000000 (B) is stored.

The item condition device information (_NB_CNDINF_B) at address "F092 (H)" is an area for storing the item condition device information, and the condition device is selected according to the presence or absence of 1BBA and 1BBB. The corresponding number is stored. The data of this address is a storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the test machine, which is generated based on the value of the accessory condition condition apparatus number of the address "F084 (H)". In the item condition device information, information is generated so that the D7 bit is always "1", and the D0 bit is set to "0" when 1BB is not won, and D0 is selected when 1BBA is won or 1BBA is inside. The bit is "1". For example, when "00000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F084 (H)" (in the present embodiment, when 1 BBA is won), "10000001 (B)" is stored in the address "F092 (H)". It is memorized.
Similarly, when "00000010 (B)" is stored at the address "F084 (H)" (when 1 BBB is won), "10000010 (B)" is stored at the address "F092 (H)" .
Furthermore, when "00000000 (B)" is stored in the address "F084 (H)" (when 1 BB is not elected), "10000000 (B)" is stored in the address "F092 (H)". Ru.
The above-mentioned conditional device information is also referred to as winning information.

  In FIG. 30, the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data (_PT_BLK_HPM) at the address "F093 (H)" are areas for storing data of the blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal, and D6 bit as the blocker signal, The D7 bit is used as the hopper motor drive signal (D0 to D5 bits are not used). When the blocker 45 is turned on, the D6 bit is set to "1", and when the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the D7 bit is set to "1". More specifically, the address "F093 (H)" is updated in the main process, the data of the output port 0 is generated based on the data of the address "F093 (H)" in the interrupt process, and the blocker 45 and hopper The motor 36 is controlled.

The medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO) of the address “F094 (H)” is an area for storing the medal signal data, and the medal bet signal is assigned to the D6 bit and the medal payout signal is assigned to the D7 bit. The allocation of this bit is set to be identical to the allocation bit of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal of the output port 4 (FIG. 20). The medal bet signal is turned on when the medal bet signal is output to the outside. Similarly, the medal payout signal is turned on when the medal payout signal is output to the outside (during transmission).
In the present embodiment, the medal bet signal is for transmitting bet medal number data (how many bets have been made and the game started) to the outside, and the stored number data is not included.

  The external signal output flag (_FL_INF_OUT) at the address "F095 (H)" is an area for storing the external signal output flag, and when the external signals 1 to 3 are output, the corresponding bit is "1". Data. These external signals 1 to 3 are the same as the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 4 (FIG. 20), and the bit assignment of these external signals 1 to 3 is identical to that of the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 4 It is set to match the bit allocation.

FIG. 31 shows a storage area for storing a timer value in the storage area of the RWM 53 of the present embodiment.
The storage area of the timer value of this embodiment has a 1-byte timer storage area and a 2-byte timer storage area. Addresses of all 1-byte timer storage areas are arranged to be continuous. Similarly, the addresses of all 2-byte timer storage areas are arranged to be contiguous. Furthermore, the 2-byte timer storage area has a 1-byte storage area for storing the upper digit and a 1-byte storage area for storing the lower digit, and the addresses of these two 1-byte storage areas are contiguous. There is.

As described above, the 2-byte timer storage area is not arranged between the two 1-byte timer storage areas. Similarly, no one byte timer storage area is arranged between two two byte timer storage areas.
In the address of the 2-byte timer storage area in this embodiment, the smaller address value indicates the address of the lower digit, and the address obtained by adding "1" to the address value of the lower digit indicates the address of the upper digit. For example, in FIG. 31, in the 2-byte timer of medal payout device control time, the address "F028 (H)" is a storage area of lower digits, and the address "F029 (H)" is a storage area of upper digits.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the addresses of the storage areas for storing timer values are arranged continuously (from serial numbers) from "F021 (H)" to "F02D (H)". Further, in the first embodiment, the start address “F021 (H)” is the reference address. The meaning of the "reference address" will be described later.

In the first embodiment of FIG. 31, the reference address starts from the 1-byte timer storage area, and after the 7 1-byte timer storage areas are continuously arranged, the 3 2-byte timer storage areas are continuously arranged. It is arranged.
Further, all timer values shown in FIG. 31 are subtracted (updated) at the time of timer measurement of the interrupt processing described later. That is, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt.
Here, in FIG. 54 to be described later, even when the interrupt processing is executed, when the power-off is detected in step S603, the timer measurement in step S605 does not proceed, so the timer value is always at the time of interrupt processing. “1” is not always subtracted (updated). Therefore, in the present specification, although each timer value shown in FIG. 31 is described as "subtracting", it actually means "being subtractable", and always "subtracting" in any case. It does not mean that.
As described above, by continuously arranging storage areas for storing timer values, it becomes possible to sequentially update all timer values by a simple method by timer measurement (FIG. 55) described later.

Further, according to the instruction of the MPU (1-chip microprocessor) of this embodiment, subtraction processing can be performed with one instruction even with a 2-byte timer. The subtraction process of the 2-byte timer is programmed as follows.
“0100 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00FF (H)”
“0001 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)”
“0000 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0000 (H)”
Note that the 1-byte timer is also
“10 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “0 F (H)”
“01 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00 (H)”
“00 (H)” → “1” subtraction → “00 (H)”
It becomes.

In other words, when a borrow occurs (is) due to the subtraction process, "0000 (H)" (in the case of 2 bytes) or "00 (H)" (in the case of 1 byte).
Here, it is determined whether the value stored in the address to be subtracted is "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)", and it is "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)". Sometimes it is conceivable to use a program that does not execute subtraction processing. In this case, it is necessary to determine whether or not "0000 (H)" or "00 (H)" and whether to execute subtraction processing according to the determination result. .
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when a digit shift occurs (is made), if “0000 (H)” or “00 (H)” is set, the value before calculation is “0000 (H)”. Alternatively, the program value can be simplified because the timer value can be updated by the same subtraction process regardless of whether it is "00 (H)" or not.

  In FIG. 31, the external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT) of the address "F021 (H)" is a storage area of a timer value for measuring the output time of the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value has become "0", the timer value "46 (D)" ("2E (H) in hexadecimal notation) is set again (step S742 in FIG. 58). Perform a count which subtracts "1" every interrupt.

In the present embodiment, the initial value of the external signal output time is “46 (D)”, and the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal are values obtained by doubling the actual bet number and the payout number.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the initial value of the external signal output time is "92 (D)" which is twice "46 (D)", and the timer value is "92 to 47 (D)" The on signal may be output, and the off signal may be output when the timer value is “46 to 1 (D)”.
In this case, in FIG. 27, the medal bet signal output frequency of the address "F070 (H)" and the medal payout signal output frequency of the address "F071 (H)" are both required to be doubled. Instead, the bet number and the payout number may be stored. Therefore, in this case, "0 to 3 (D)" is stored as the number of medal bet signal outputs for address "F070 (H)", and the number of medal payout signals for address "F071 (H)" is stored. , “0 to 10 (D)” are stored.

For example, under the situation where "3" is stored in the medal bet signal output count of the address "F 070 (H)", when the timer value is "92 to 47 (D)", the ON signal is output and the timer value is In the case of "46 to 1 (D)", control is performed to output the off signal. Then, when the timer value becomes “0”, processing for subtracting the number of medal bet signal output times by “1” (in this example, processing for updating from “3 (D)” to “2 (D)”), And a process of resetting the timer value “92 (D)”.
When “3 (D)” is stored as the medal bet signal output count of the address “F 070 (H)” by repeating such processing until the medal bet signal output count becomes “0”, the medal is stored. The process of outputting the on signal as the bet signal and the process of outputting the off signal are executed three times. In addition, under the condition that “0” is stored in the medal bet signal output count of the address “F070 (H)”, the count processing for subtracting the timer value by “1” for each interrupt (timer value is “92 to Although the process of circulating 0 (D) is performed, the control is performed so that the off signal is output regardless of the timer value.
The above description is given taking the medal bet signal as an example, but the output of the on signal and the output of the off signal of the medal payout signal are the same processing (data of address "F071 (H)" and address "F021 ( H) can be controlled).

  The reel stop acceptance standby time (_TM1_STOP) of the address “F022 (H)” is a storage area of a timer value that measures the standby time until the next stop switch 42 is operated after the stop switch 42 is operated. . When the first or second stop switch 42 is operated, the timer value "7 (D)" ("7 (H)" in hexadecimal notation) is set (step S326 in FIG. 51), and "1" 'Perform counting to subtract.

Payout sensor check time (_TM1_PAY) at address “F023 (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for monitoring the detection of payout after stopping the driving of the hopper motor 36 and a timer value for detecting a medal jam. is there. In the present embodiment, a timer value “46 (D)” (“2E (H) in hexadecimal number”) is set as a detection time when a predetermined timing is reached in one medal payout (M_1 MEDAL_PAY) described later. Perform a count which subtracts "1" every interrupt.
Specifically, first, when the signal of the payout sensor 1 is detected, the timer value “46 (D)” is set as the payout sensor 1 detection time (step S259 in FIG. 46), and the timer value is “0. If the signal from the payout sensor 1 is on even if the condition is “1”, it is determined that the medal is jammed.

Second, when the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is turned off, the timer value "46 (D)" is set as the payout sensor 1 detection time (step S261 in FIG. 46), and the timer value becomes "0". If the signal of the payout sensor 1 does not turn on even when it has occurred, it is determined that the medal empty error (hopper empty).
Furthermore, thirdly, when the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on and then the payout sensor 1 and 2 signals are turned on, a timer value “46 (D)” is set as the payout sensor 2 detection time (see FIG. 46 steps S268). Then, when the signal of the payout sensor 2 is not turned off even when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the medal is jammed.

The condition device output time (_TM1_COND_OUT) of the address “F024 (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the output time of the condition device signal (winning and replay condition device information, and bonus condition device information). is there. In the present embodiment, “25 (D)” (“19 (H)” in hexadecimal) is set after the minimum game time has elapsed (step S316 in FIG. 50) and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Ru.
In the present embodiment, approximately 243.5 interrupts are counted and approximately 53.64 ms are counted, and this 53.64 ms is the output time of the condition device signal. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, after the timer value “25 (D)” is set after the minimum game time has elapsed, the timer value is “24 (D)” (“hexadecimal number”) in the first interrupt process. 18 (H) ") is updated. Then, while the timer value is “24 (D) to 13 (D)” (hexadecimal number, “18 (H) to D (H)”), the part condition device information is output, and the timer value is While “12 (D) to 1 (D)” (in hexadecimal, “C (H) to 1 (H)”), winning and replay condition device information is output. Furthermore, while the timer value is "0", the value "0" is output as the conditional device information.

  The external signal 4 output time (_TM1_POWER_ON) at power failure recovery at address "F025 (H)" is a memory value area of timer value that counts the time to output external signal 4 (D1 bit of output port 4) at power failure recovery. is there. In the present embodiment, when recovery from a power failure is detected, “136 (D)” (“88 (H) in hexadecimal) is set as the initial value of this value (step S39 in FIG. 33), and one interrupt is generated. Subtract 1 each time. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is output until this value becomes “0”.

  The blocker off monitoring time (_TM1_BLOFF_CHK) for the address “F026 (H)” is set when the passage sensor 43a rises (step S702 in FIG. 56), and stores the timer value for waiting when the blocker 45 is turned off Area. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, "144 (D)" ("90 (H)" in hexadecimal notation) is set as an initial value, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, the blocker 45 is not turned off from before the value becomes “0”. In this way, the passage sensor 43a does not turn off the blocker 45 for a certain period of time after detecting the medal by preventing the medals from being pinched between the medal selector and the blocker 45 (thus, a medal retention error etc. To prevent

  The blocker on monitoring time (_TM1_BLON_CHK) of the address “F027 (H)” is set at the rising of the passage sensor 43a (step S703 in FIG. 56), and stores the timer value for waiting when the blocker 45 is turned on. Area. When the rising data of the passage sensor 43a is detected, "45 (D)" ("2D (H)" in hexadecimal notation) is set as an initial value, and "1" is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, the blocker 45 is not turned off from before the value becomes “0”. As described above, the reason why the blocker 45 is not turned on from the off state for a certain period of time after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal is to prevent the medals from being pinched between the medal selector and the blocker 45 as described above. is there.

Furthermore, the difference between the waiting time for turning on the blocker 45 ("145" interrupt) and the waiting time for turning on from off ("46" interrupt) is that the blocker 45 has a difference from on This is because the time required to turn off is longer than the time required to turn on the blocker 45 from off to on.
Although not illustrated in the present embodiment, when the blocker 45 is turned on from the off state, it is performed by attracting by the magnetic force of the magnet. On the other hand, when the blocker 45 is turned off from the on state, it is due to an operation of releasing it with a spring. Thus, it is based on the difference between the time to turn on from off and the time to turn off from on depending on the difference in the power used.

The medal payout device control time (_TM2_HE_CHK) at the addresses “F028 (H)” and “F029 (H)” is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the control time of the medal payout device, ie, hopper motor 36 When the driving of the hopper motor 36 is started, an initial value is set to count the number of times of interruption "2686" (step S255 in FIG. 46). Then, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, set “2686 (D)” (“0A7E (H)” in hexadecimal) or “FF (H)” in “0A7E (H)”. Set "0B7D (H)" added. The method of determining whether or not the number of interrupts "2686" has been counted differs depending on which value is set. This point will be described later.
When the initial value "0A7E (H)" is set, when the timer value is "0", it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.
On the other hand, when the initial value "0B7D (H)" is set, when the timer value is "00FF (H)" or less, it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.

The game standby display start time (_TM2_BACK_OFF) of the addresses "F02A (H)" and "F02B (H)" is an area for storing a timer value for measuring the standby time until the game standby display is performed. At the time of game start set (MS_GAME_SET), an initial value is set to count the number of times of interruption "26846" (step S81 in FIG. 35). In addition, the game standby display start time of this embodiment is set to "about 60 seconds" (26846 x 2.235 ms 60 60 seconds).
Here, as the initial value of the timer value, “26846 (D)” (“68 DE (H)” in hexadecimal notation) is set, or “68 DE (H)” is set to “FF (H)” as described above. Set “69 DD (H)” added with “)”. Then, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
When the initial value "68 DE (H)" is set, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed when the timer value is "0".
On the other hand, when the initial value "69 DD (H)" is set, when the timer value is "00FF (H)" or less, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

The minimum playing time (_TM2_GAME) of the addresses "F02C (H)" and "F02D (H)" is a timer that monitors one minimum playing time, and when it is determined that the minimum playing time has elapsed, the number of interrupts The initial value is set to count "1836" (step S312 in FIG. 50). In addition, the minimum game time of this embodiment is set to “about 4.1 seconds” (2.235 ms × 1836 ≒ 4100 ms).
Here, as an initial value of the timer value, set “1836 (D)” (“072 C (H)” in hexadecimal) or add “FF (H)” to “072 C (H)” Set "082B (H)". Then, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt.
When the initial value "072C (H)" is set, when the timer value is "0", it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed.
On the other hand, when the initial value "082B (H)" is set, when the timer value is "00FF (H)" or less, it is determined that the minimum game time has passed.

  Note that the timer shown in FIG. 31 described above is a count value stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53, and the progress of the game is possible even after the predetermined value is set. This point is different from the 2-byte time waiting process (FIG. 39) described later. In the 2-byte wait process, the interrupt wait process (FIG. 40) is executed, and in the meanwhile, the progress of the game is in a wait (wait process) state.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) will be described based on a flowchart.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a process (M_PRG_START) when the main control board 50 starts a program.
In FIG. 39, when the program is started in step S11, the main control board 50 initializes a register in the next step S12. As a specific process, for example, a process of storing the upper address (F0 (H) in this embodiment) of the RWM 53 in the Q register can be mentioned. By this processing, for example, when specifying the address of RWM 53, the lower address (for example, when specifying address "F021 (H)", only "21 (H)") is specified, and the specification is made with the Q register. By combining with the data (F0 (H)), it becomes possible to specify the address "F021 (H)" of the RWM 53, which leads to the reduction of the program capacity.

  Next, at step S13, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off process completion flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned off (step S619 in FIG. 54), the power-off processed flag is stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53. The power-off process completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off has normally been performed when the power is turned on. When it is determined in step S13 that the power-off process completion flag is the normal value ("01 (H)" in the present embodiment), the process proceeds to step S14 and the normal value is not (in the present embodiment, " If it is determined that “01 (H)” is not used, the process proceeds to step S16 without calculating checksum data in steps S14 and S15.

In step S14, calculation of the checksum of RWM 53 is executed. Specifically, checksum calculation of the same range (for example, work area used by program, unused area, stack area) of RWM 53 executed at the time of power off processing Run.
In this embodiment, the checksum of the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is performed, and the checksum data of the RWM 53 is set so that the data becomes “0” by the checksum.

In step S15, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 for which the current checksum has been calculated, and it is determined whether the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the calculation of the checksum is not completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S16.
When initializing data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53 also in the subsequent processes, in the present embodiment, the same process is executed in the range of the designated RWM 53.

  In step S16, the main control board 50 stores the power failure recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, a B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off process completion flag is the normal value and the checksum data of the RWM 53 is the normal value, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completion flag is an abnormal value (when "No" in step S13), and / or the checksum data of RWM 53 is an abnormal value (checking of the entire range calculated in step S14) If it is determined that the sum data value is not “0”, an abnormal value is stored as the power failure recovery data.

  In the next step S17, level data of input port 1 (FIG. 18) is stored in a predetermined register (for example, the A register). Next, in step S18, it is determined based on the level data of the input port 1 whether or not the designated switch is on. Here, in the present embodiment, two “designated switches” are a signal (D1) of the door switch 15 and a signal (D3) of the setting key switch 12 in the input port 1.

And only when the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front cover (chassis) is opened) and the signal of the setting key switch 12 is on (when the setting key is inserted) Allow configuration changes. When all two designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to setting change processing of step S22, but when at least one designated switch is not turned on, it is not permitted to shift to setting changing processing of step S22 .
That is, when the signal of the door switch 15 is off (when the front cover is closed), the signal of the setting key switch 12 can not be turned on, and the possibility of fraud is high. Do not allow migration to processing.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19. When it is determined that the all designation switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 50 determines whether the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value. The power failure recovery data is data stored in the register in step S16.

When it is determined that the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S22 while holding that the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value (data stored in step S16). If it is determined that the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether the setting change impossible flag is on. Here, the setting change impossible flag is a D6 bit value of the above-mentioned medal management flag (FIG. 25), and in FIG. 34, it is between the combination lottery process (step S60) and the game end check process (step S69) It is a flag that is disabled. When the setting change impossible flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21. When the setting change impossible flag is not on, the setting change process of step S22 is performed while holding that the power-off recovery data is a normal value (data stored in step S16). move on. Thus, in the present embodiment, the setting change process when the power failure recovery data is an abnormal value, and the setting change process when the power failure recovery data is a normal value are included.
Although the setting change impossible flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change impossible flag may not be provided if the setting change is always possible. In that case, the processes corresponding to steps S19 and S20 become unnecessary, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S22 regardless of whether the power failure recovery is abnormal.

  In step S21, the main control board 50 determines whether the power failure recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to that at step S19, and refers to the data stored in the register at step S16. When it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23 and the power recovery processing (FIG. 33) is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24 to perform recovery impossible error processing. An error when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value in step S21 is referred to as an "E1" error in this embodiment, and the fact that it is "E1" is displayed on digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) Do. The non-returnable error is an error that can not be canceled unless the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Specifically, it is possible to cancel the predetermined range (in the present embodiment, F000 (H) to F1FF (H)) of RWM 53 by clearing RWM in the setting change process.

As described above, in the program start process, when the power failure recovery data is the normal value or the abnormal value, the process proceeds to the setting change process when the setting change is possible.
If the designated switch is not on ("No" in step S18) or if the setting change is not possible, if the power-off recovery data is an abnormal value ("No" in step S21), error processing is not possible. If the power failure recovery data is a normal value ("Yes" in step S21), the process proceeds to the power recovery processing (FIG. 33).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) of step S23 in FIG.
First, in step S31, the stack pointer is returned. Here, the stack pointer is an area of the RWM 53 (a stack value, for example, a register value, a program address of the instruction processing of the main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) when the power interruption occurs, It is called an area, and in the present embodiment, it is one of the registers (also referred to as an SP register) indicating which area (address) has been saved among F1E0 (H) to F1FF (H)). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53 in the power-off process in step S619, and the value stored in the address is stored in the stack pointer in step S31.
In the next step S32, the setting value stored in the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the range of the setting value is a normal range (whether "1" to "6"). If it is determined that the set value is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S33. If it is determined that the set value is not in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S42, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process. The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in this embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78).

At step S33, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S34, initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S33 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that values are stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to corruption etc. Therefore, initialize the unused area at power on (usually once a day). There is.
In the next step S35, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 53 has been completed, and when it is determined that the initialization has been completed, the process proceeds to step S36. At step S36, data (FIGS. 21 to 23) of the input ports 0 to 2 are set, and at the next step S37, the input ports 0 to 2 are read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before power-off to the latest data.

Next, in step S38, specific information data at the time of power on is set. This processing is processing for setting the D6 bit (transmission bit at power failure recovery) of the specific information flag (FIG. 24) to "1". In the next step S39, the external signal 4 output time is set at the time of power failure recovery. In this processing, “136 (D)” is set as the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery of the address “F025 (H)” in FIG. Thus, this value is subtracted for each interrupt.
In the next step S40, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 54) is to be executed after the process.
Next, in step S41, the power-off process completion flag is cleared, that is, set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. In addition, after the processing according to this flowchart ends, during the main processing of FIG. 34, it is configured to return to the step immediately before power-off.

In the power supply recovery process described above, the interrupt process is activated (step S40) after the reading of the input ports 0 to 2 is executed (step S37). The reason is as follows.
As described later, during the game standby time, the setting key can be inserted to confirm the setting value. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1”, it is determined that the confirmation of the set value is ended.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is cut off during the setting confirmation, and the power switch is turned off (with the setting key removed) to start up the power switch.

In this case, since the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 12 is turned off by the interrupt processing after the power failure and recovery, the falling of the setting key switch is detected. Ru.
As a result, the state at the time of power failure recovery and the state before the power failure are different. Specifically, while the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 is "0" in the state before the power failure, the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes "1" at the time of the power failure recovery.
Therefore, as described above, in order to avoid different states before and after the power off, the values of RWM 53 of the input ports 0 to 2 are updated to the latest state at the time of the power off and recovery. After executing the reading process, the interrupt process is started.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment. Then, during this main processing, interrupt processing (FIG. 54) described later is performed every 2.235 ms.
Also, FIGS. 35 to 53 show a process of showing a subroutine in the main process.

In FIG. 34, in step S51, the stack pointer is set. Specifically, it is a process of setting "F200 (H)" as an initial value as a stack pointer. For example, when "F200 (H)" is designated as the stack pointer, an address at which information such as a register is stored in the stack area is one of the stack areas (F1E0 (H) to F1FF (H)). It becomes "F1FF (H)".
In the next step S52, a game start set process (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. If it progresses to step S52, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 35 mentioned later.

In the next step S53, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time (different from reading of the stored number).
In the next step S54, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S53.

  If it is determined in step S54 that a bet medal is present, the process proceeds to step S56. If it is determined that a bet medal is not present, the process proceeds to step S55 to wait for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP; FIG. 42), and proceeds to step S56. The medal insertion waiting process is a process of detecting a setting key switch signal, and determining whether or not the game standby display start time has elapsed.

In step S56, a medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK; FIG. 43) is performed. This process is a process of determining whether a medal has been inserted, whether the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
At the next step S57, the software random number is updated. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” each) processing random numbers for processing (calculation processing) into random numbers (hard random numbers or built-in random numbers) used by the combination lottery means 61. The soft random numbers are 16-bit random numbers having a range of 0 to 65535 (D). Note that, as an update method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) is added to a value before update.

In the next step S58, the main control board 50 performs start switch check processing (M_START_CHK; FIG. 48). This process is a process of determining whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined in step S58 that the start switch 41 is operated, the process proceeds to step S59. If it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S53.
In step S59, start switch acceptance processing (MS_START_CTL; FIG. 49) is performed. In this process, various flags are set, the number of outputs of the medal bet signal is set, and the like.

  Next, proceeding to step S60, the main control board 50 (combination lottery means 61) performs lottery of a combination (condition device). Here, at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received, the lottery of the winning combination is executed. That is, the random number value at the time of the role lottery is acquired by receiving the start switch in step S59. Then, in step S60, it is determined using the lottery table whether or not the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to any one of the condition devices. The condition device number won here is stored in the winning and replay condition device number shown in FIG.

In the next step S61, the main control board 50 (pushing order instruction number selecting means 63) executes a pushing order instruction number setting process. In this processing, in a game (instruction function operation game) displaying push order instruction information according to the condition device that has won, a process of selecting the push order instruction number and storing it in the push order instruction number of RWM 53 in FIG. I do. By this processing, push order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Next, proceeding to step S62, the main control board 50 (effect group number selection means 64) executes an effect group number setting process. In this process, the effect group number corresponding to the selected condition device is selected, and the process of storing the selected number in the effect group number of RWM 53 in FIG. 28 or transmitting the effect group number to the sub control board 80 Is a process of storing the effect group number in the control command buffer.

In the next step S63, reel rotation start preparation processing (M_REEL_READY; FIG. 50) is executed. In this process, it is determined whether the minimum game time has passed, and a process of storing the conditional device information corresponding to the winning conditional device number.
Next, at step S64, the reel control means 65 starts the rotation of the reels 31. In the next step S65, the main control board 50 performs stop control (M_REEL_STOP; FIG. 51) of the reels 31. This process is a process for stopping the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected.

If it is determined in step S65 that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S66.
In step S66, first, display determination of a symbol is performed. Here, it is determined by the prize determination means 66 whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line. Then, according to the combination of the stopped symbols, the symbol combination flag is updated in FIG. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of replay has stopped at the effective line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".

In step S66, secondly, in FIG. 27, the value of the medal payout number data is updated. For example, when one winning combination is won and the medal payout number data so far is “0”, “0” is updated to “1”. Further, in FIG. 27, the value of the medal payout number data buffer is similarly updated.
Next, at step S67, it is determined whether or not a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error of a symbol has occurred, the process proceeds to step S72, and if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S68.

  Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position defined by the stop position determination table. However, when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the effective line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined that it is abnormal, and when it proceeds to step S72, return is impossible. Execute error processing. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an "E5" error, and the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) indicate "E5", and the main processing is stopped.

In the next step S68, the payout means 67 executes payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY; FIG. 52) of medals corresponding to the winning combination. This process is an actual medal payout process, a process of setting the payout signal output count, or the like. In the next step S69, the main control board 50 executes a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK; FIG. 53). This process is, for example, a process of clearing various flags.
In the next step S70, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of storing information to be transmitted as a control command in the D register and the E register in order to transmit to the sub control board 80 that one game is over. Specifically, it is a process of storing “3F (H)” in the D register and “FF (H)” in the E register.

Next, in step S71, the main control board 50 executes control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET; FIG. 36). This processing is processing for storing control command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a control command buffer (not shown) provided in the RWM 53.
And if the process of step S71 is complete | finished, it will return to step S50 again.

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S52 of FIG.
First, in step S81, the game standby display start time is set. This processing is processing for setting "26846 (D)" or "27101 (D)" to the game standby display start time of the address "F02A (H)" in FIG. Here, when the game standby display start time is set, “1” is subtracted from each time one interrupt process from this time point.

  When the game standby display start time becomes "0", while waiting for medal insertion in FIG. 42, the acquired number data (address "F06E (H)" in FIG. 27) is cleared in step S162. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out for the previous game is "9" and the player settles by operating the settlement switch 46 and the game is over, "00" is displayed after about one minute. Be done. This has the effect that the number of vacant tables can be reduced by the fact that a store clerk or another player in the hall can recognize them as vacant tables.

It should be noted that the acquired number display LED 78 after the game standby display start time has elapsed is not limited to the display of “00”, and may be “* 0” or “**”. Here, “*” indicates that the light is off.
In addition, when displaying as "* 0", when a game standby display start time is "0", setting the LED display request flag (after-mentioned) of digit 3 to "0" is mentioned. As a result, even if the interrupt processing is lighting of the digit 3, control is performed so that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are not lighted.
Similarly, when displaying “**”, when the game standby display start time is “0”, the LED display request flag of the digits 3 and 4 may be set to “0”. As a result, even if the interrupt processing is lighting of digit 3 or digit 4, control is performed so that segments A to G of digit 3 or digit 4 are not lit.

Next, the process proceeds to step S82, and initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process is a process of clearing the push order instruction number stored at the address "F085 (H)" in FIG.
In the next step S83, data of the symbol combination display flag is acquired. This processing is processing for storing the symbol combination on the activated line after the stop of the reel 31 in the previous game, that is, the data of the symbol combination display flag ("F015 (H)" in FIG. 26) in the A register.
In the next step S84, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operating symbol is displayed. In this process, it is determined whether the D3 bit stored in the A register value is "1". When it is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", "No" It will be judged. When it is determined that the 1BB operating symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S85, and when it is determined that the 1BB operating pattern is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S86.

  In step S85, the obtainable number of sheets during 1BB operation (1BB game) is stored. This processing stores (stores) a predetermined value, for example, the value "150" (FIG. 10) in the case of 1 BBA, in an area (not shown) for storing the obtainable number of 1BB games provided in RWM 53. It is a process. Then, the process proceeds to step S86.

In the next step S86, an operating state flag is generated. In step S86, the following processes (1) to (5) are performed.
(1) The address of the operation state flag is stored in the HL register. As shown in FIG. 26, since the address of the operation state flag is "F014 (H)", the H register value = "F0 (H)" and the L register value = "14 (H)".
(2) Next, OR operation is performed on the information stored in the A register value and the address indicated by the HL register value (in other words, the address specified by the HL register value, and so forth). Store in register. Here, the data of the symbol combination display flag is stored in the A register in step S83, and the information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is the information of the operation state flag.

Specifically, for example, it is as follows.
Example 1)
When a combination of 1BB symbols is displayed,
A register value: 00001000 (B)
Information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value: 00000000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00001000 (B)
It becomes.
Example 2)
If the 1BB symbol combination is already displayed, and 1BB and RB are in operation,
A register value: 00000000 (B)
Information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00011000 (B)
It becomes.

Example 3)
When the 1BB symbol combination is already displayed and the 1BB is in operation but the RB is not in operation,
A register value: 00000000 (B)
Information stored in the address indicated by the HL register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value after OR operation: 00001000 (B)
It becomes.

(3) The A register value is stored in the C register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)

(4) The information stored in the A register and the information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1" are ANDed, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00001000 (B)
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000 (B)
A register value after AND operation: 00001000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
Information in which the bit corresponding to 1BB is set to "1": 00001000 (B)
A register value after AND operation: 00001000 (B)

(5) The A register value is rotationally shifted to the left, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
A register value (before calculation): 00001000 (B)
A register value (after operation): 00010000 (B)

In the next step S87, the operating state flag is updated. This process is a process of ORing the A register value and the C register value, and storing the calculation result in the A register.
For example, taking the above Example 1) to Example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after OR operation): 00011000 (B)
Example 2)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value (after OR operation): 00011000 (B)
Example 3)
A register value: 00010000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after OR operation): 00011000 (B)

Further, in the next step S88, the operating state flag is stored (stored). This process is a process of storing the value stored in the A register in the address of the RWM 53 (that is, the operating state flag) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the information of the operation state flag updated in step S87 is replaced with the information of the operation state flag up to that point.
For example, as shown in Example 1, when the symbol combination of 1BB is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag changes from "0" to "1".
Also, as in Example 2, when 1BB and RB are in operation, the state is maintained (D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag and D4 bit corresponding to RB are “1”).

  Furthermore, as in Example 3, when the 1BB is in operation but the RB is not in operation, the D4 bit corresponding to the RB of the operation state flag changes from "0" to "1". In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the second game (or when winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied (operating state When the D3 bit corresponding to 1BB of the flag is "1"), "1" is set in this step S88.

In the next step S89, it is determined whether the RB operation has started. This process is a process of XORing the information stored in the A register and the information stored in the C register, storing the operation result in the A register, and determining whether the zero flag is "1" .
Taking the above example 1) to example 3) as an example, it becomes as follows.
Example 1) and Example 3)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00001000 (B)
A register value (after XOR operation): 00010000 (B) (zero flag ≠ 1)
Example 2)
A register value: 00011000 (B)
C register value: 00011000 (B)
A register value (after XOR operation): 00000000 (B) (zero flag = 1)

When the zero flag = “1”, the determination is “No” and the process proceeds to step S91. When the zero flag ≠ “1”, the determination is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S90. As described above, in step S89,
a) At the start of the 1BB game b) After the completion of the RB operation, if the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied, it is judged as "Yes".
In the next step S90, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. In this process, "2" is stored (stored) in the storage area (not shown) of the game number counter at the time of RB operation provided in RWM 53, and the storage area of the number-of-winnings counter at the time of RB operation (not shown) ) Is a process of storing (storing) “2”. Then, the process proceeds to step S91.

  It should be noted that the game number counter at the time of RB operation and the number-of-winnings counter at the time of RB operation are both set to “2” as the initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of wins increases by “1” The counter is decremented one by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the initial value of these counter values is set to “0”, and each time the number of games or the number of wins increases by “1”, it is incremented by “1”, and these counter values are “2”. It may be determined whether or not

  In step S91, it is determined based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S83 whether or not the combination of symbols of replay is displayed (replay has won). When it is determined that the combination of symbols of replay is displayed, the process proceeds to step S92, and when it is determined that the combination of symbols is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S94.

  In step S92, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game (address "F06B (H)" in FIG. 27). Next, proceeding to step S93, the automatic bet amount data is set. This processing is processing of updating the automatic bet number data of the address "F06A (H)" in FIG. 27 (for example, storing "3 (D)" in the normal game).

  Next, proceeding to step S94, an output request for the operating state is set. In the next step S95, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, a control command for transmitting information indicating that the replay has been activated or that 1BB has been activated to the sub control board 80 is stored in the control command buffer. Although not shown, control commands are stored in the control command buffer in order to transmit information on the setting value of the current game, information on the RT of the current game, and the like. Then, the process proceeds to step S96, and proceeds to medal acceptance start processing (MS_MEDAL_START; FIG. 38).

  FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing processing of control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) in step S71 etc. of FIG. 34, for example. Specifically, this process is a process that is executed when the control command for transmission is stored in the control command buffer in the main process. In other words, when a control command to be transmitted is stored in the control command buffer by interrupt processing, control command set 1 is not executed, and control command set 2 described later is directly executed.

First, in step S501, interrupt disable processing is performed. In the next step S502, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET; FIG. 37) is executed. Then, in step S503, the interrupt process prohibited in step S501 is released (that is, interrupt permission). By the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited while the control command set 2 is being executed.
Then, in the control command set 2, the control command is written as described below, but the interrupt processing is prohibited as described above while the control command set 2 is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to the execution of the interrupt processing during the write processing of the control command.

Here, an interrupt flag for storing the inhibition / cancellation of the interrupt is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing for executing the next interrupt processing (within 2.235 ms from the time of disabling the interrupt processing) has arrived after the interrupt processing is inhibited in step S501. Then, the main CPU 55 clears the interrupt flag when releasing the prohibited interrupt processing.
When the timing for executing the interrupt processing has come, the main control board 50 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, and determines whether to enable or disable the interrupt processing.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) in step S502 of FIG. As described above, when one control command is stored in the control command buffer by the interrupt processing, control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET) is not executed. Further, when the control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed, information constituting one control command is stored in the D register and the E register.
First, in step S511, the address (not shown) of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the control command buffer in the HL register. Although not illustrated in FIGS. 21 to 31 described above, the RWM 53 is provided with a plurality of storage areas for storing control command buffers.
In the next step S512, the control command write pointer value is acquired. The control command write pointer is for specifying to which address of the RWM 53 the data of the control command is to be written, and since the current write pointer is stored at a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53, It performs processing to read the write pointer.
The processing here stores the control command write pointer value in the A register value. For example, when the value stored in the control command write pointer value is “1”, the A register value is “1”.

In the next step S513, the designated address is acquired. In this process, a write address (of RWM 53) is obtained from the head address of the control command buffer and data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Next, proceeding to step S514, the data of the designated address is acquired. This process is a process of reading data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 of the address obtained in step S513 of the preprocess.

At “control command <64?” In the next step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the data of the designated address (the A register value stored in step S514) is “0”. , “Yes”.
Here, “No” is determined in step S515 when the A register value is not “0”. If the A register value is not "0", it means that data is already written in the control command buffer of the address indicated by the control command write pointer value, and data can not be written in the address. In this way, when there is data at the designated address, the data writing process is not executed, so that overwriting when there is data at the designated address is prevented.
When it is judged as "Yes" at Step S515, it progresses to Step S516, and when it is judged as "No", the processing by this flowchart is ended.

In "store control command in RWM" in the next step S516, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value. Then, the E register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and the D register value is stored in the address indicated by the “HL + 1” register value.
As a result, the E register value and the D register value can be stored in two consecutive RWM 53 addresses (control command buffer).

In the next step S517, the control command write pointer value is updated.
In this process, first, the control command write pointer value stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 is stored in the HL register.
Next, "1" is added to the value stored in the HL register. Here, when “64 (D)” is exceeded as a result of adding “1”, “0” is set.
Then, the value after addition (the value stored in the HL register) is stored in the control command write pointer value. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S96 of FIG.
First, in step S101, data on the number of bet medals is cleared. That is, the bet number in the previous game is cleared. Specifically, in FIG. 27, the value of the medal bet amount data at the address “F06B (H)” is set to “0”.
Next, in step S102, the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are turned off. Specifically, in FIG. 25, processing is performed to set bits D0 to D2 of the bet number display LED signal data of the address "F012 (H)" to "0". The bet number of the previous game may be displayed by the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c without executing step S102. This makes it possible to check how many medals have been betted and played in the previous game. Then, the display of the bet display LEDs (79a to 79c) may be updated only when the medal for the current game is actually bet.
In the next step S103, the medal management flag is initialized. Specifically, in FIG. 25, processing is performed to set the D0, D2 to D4, D6, and D7 bits of the medal management flag of the address "F011 (H)" to "0".

  In the next step S104, the main control board 50 checks the operating state flag. Here, the operation state flag is checked in order to determine whether or not the replay operation is in progress in the next step S105. In the present embodiment, in step S104, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operation state flag (FIG. 26) is read.

Next, in step S105, it is determined based on the reading in step S104 whether or not the replay operation is in progress, that is, whether the D0 bit is "1". When it is determined that the D0 bit is "1", that is, when the replay operation is in progress, the process proceeds to step S106, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S118.
If it is determined that the replay is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S118, the process of turning on the blocker 45 (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 41) is executed, and the process according to this flowchart ends. That is, when the replay is not activated, the maintenance insertion of the medal is uniformly permitted.
Therefore, in the medal acceptance start process of this flowchart, the processes after step S106 correspond to the automatic bet process at the time of replay operation.

  In step S106, the standby time at the time of replay operation is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 500 ms as the wait time, the count value “237” of the number of interrupts (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms) is set. Therefore, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "11101101 (B)" is set as the C register value. That is, to execute the 2-byte time waiting process in step S108, the upper byte value of the waiting time is stored in the B register, and the lower byte value is stored in the C register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S108, and a 2-byte time wait process (R_2 BYTE_WAIT; FIG. 39) is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0". This standby process is provided to prevent the replay display LED 79f from lighting up immediately after the end of the game (step S111) and preventing automatic betting immediately after the end of the game (step S114) , Because this is not desirable). Thereby, the timing of the automatic bet can be made appropriate.
Furthermore, for example, at the time of replay winning, it is possible to provide the player with an effect at the time of replay winning (including the sound effect at the time of replay winning etc.) to the player using the 2-byte waiting process (2-byte waiting process During the game, the game progress is waited (the wait process is executed), so the effect can not be canceled).
Further, the bet sound at the time of the automatic bet is output based on the command stored in step S112 and step S113.

  When the 2-byte waiting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S108, and the number of stored sheets is read. Here, as described above, the stored sheet number data is performed by reading the stored sheet number display data of the address "F06F (H)" in FIG. In the next step S109, it is determined whether or not the number of stored sheets is the limit number (50 sheets in the present embodiment). If it is determined that the number is the limit, the process proceeds to step S111. If it is determined that the number is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S110.

In step S110, the blocker is controlled to be turned on, that is, to allow acceptance of medals. Then, the process proceeds to step S111.
As described above, first, when the replay is not activated, the blocker 45 is always turned on to permit acceptance of medals. Even when the replay operation is not in progress, the bet medals (three in the normal game) are consumed even if the stored number is the upper limit number (50 sheets) in the previous game, and it is possible to bet for that amount .

Second, when the number of stored medals is not the limit during replay operation, the blocker 45 is turned on to permit acceptance of medals. If the number of stored medals is not the limit, it is possible to at least add the number of stored medals by maintenance of the medals.
Furthermore, thirdly, at the time of replay operation, when the number of stored medals is the limit number, the blocker 45 is not turned on (the blocker 45 is maintained in the off state until then). When the replay is activated and the number of stored medals is the upper limit, the medals can not be bet and the number of stored medals can not be added, so that medals are not accepted.

In step S111, the process of lighting the replay display LED is performed. This process is a process of turning on (“1”) the D3 bit of the medal management flag (FIG. 25).
The process of actually turning on the replay display LED 79f is performed by the LED display control of step S606 in the interrupt process (FIG. 54) described later.
As described above, since the lighting process of the replay display LED 79f is executed after the execution of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S107, the replay display LED 79f is not illuminated at the moment the replay is displayed, but after the replay is displayed. It will light up after about 0.5 seconds.

Then, in the next step S112, an output request setting process for transmitting a command indicating that automatic betting has been performed is performed on the sub control board 80, and in the next step S113, the control command set 1 process is performed. .
In the next step S114, a process of adding one medal (here, an automatic betting process is meant), that is, an automatic bet (addition) of medals is made one by one to make an automatic bet based on a replay winning. Do the processing. It is to be noted that, on the basis of the execution of one medal addition in step S114, the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED signal data of the address "F012 (H)" in FIG. 25 are updated. Thereby, the lighting mode of the bet number display LEDs 79a to 79c is updated by the interrupt process described later.

Next, the process proceeds to step S115, and a standby time for automatic bet based on replay is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the count value “46” of the number of interrupts (46 × 2.235 ms = about 103 ms) is set. Therefore, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value. Next, in step S116, a 2-byte time waiting process is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0", as described above. When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S116 is completed, the process proceeds to step S117, and it is determined whether or not the medal limit number (3 sheets in the normal game) has been reached. End the process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of medals has not reached the limit, the process returns to step S114, and the one medal addition (automatic bet) process is executed again.

  As described above, in the automatic bet at the time of replay winning, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S115 and S116 is executed in conjunction with the automatic betting of medals one by one, so the one medal adding process of step S114 is Is executed every about 100 ms. As a result, the bet number display LED signal data is also updated every about 100 ms. Therefore, it is possible to show the player that the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c sequentially light up (approximately every 100 ms). Furthermore, when the automatic bet sound (sound such as "pull") is output from the speaker 22 on the sub control board 80 side, the change in lighting of the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c can be synchronized with the automatic bet sound. When the processes of steps S115 and S116 are not performed, it is possible to show the player that all the bet number display LEDs 79a to 79c are lit uniformly.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing 2-byte time wait processing (R_2 BYTE _ WAIT).
First, in step S521, it is determined whether a 2-byte waiting time has elapsed. In this process, the value of the BC register is determined, and it is determined whether it is "0" (whether the B register value is "0" and the C register value is "0"). Specifically, for example, when the B register value = "1" and the C register value = "0", it is determined that the value is not "0". Alternatively, when the B register value = “0” and the C register value = “0”, it is determined to be “0”.
If it is determined in step S521 that the value is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is ended. If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S522.

  In step S522, an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT; FIG. 40) is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interruption time (2.235 ms) elapses. Then, when the interrupt waiting process is completed, the process proceeds to step S523, the standby time updating process is performed, and the process returns to step S521. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the BC register value. Specifically, for example, when B register value = “1” and C register value = “0”, when “1” is subtracted, B register value = “0”, C register value = “255 (D)” It becomes. Alternatively, for example, when B register value = “0” and C register value = “1”, subtracting “1” results in B register value = “0” and C register value = “0”.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT).
First, in step S531, the interrupt counter value is stored in the A register. Here, in the present embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16-bit (2-byte counter) in two addresses of “F081 (H)” and “F082 (H)” in FIG. 28, but in step S531 The value stored in the lower 8-bit address "F081 (H)" is stored in the A register.

  Next, proceeding to step S532, it is determined in FIG. 28 whether or not the interrupt counter value (value of lower 8 bits stored in the address "F081 (H)") has changed. Specifically, the process of subtracting the interrupt counter value stored at the address "F081 (H)" from the A register value is executed, and the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"). , "No". When it is determined that the change has been made, the processing of this flowchart is ended, and when it is determined that the change has not been made, the processing of step S532 is continued.

  Also, as described above, when using an 8-bit value (1-byte counter) as the interrupt counter value, the interrupt counter value is stored only in the address "F081 (H)", so that the address "F081 (H Value is stored in the A register, and in step S532, it is determined whether the value stored at the address "F081 (H)" has changed.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing blocker ON (MS_BLOCKER_ON) in step S110 etc. of FIG.
First, in step S131, the main control board 50 checks the passage of the blocker-on monitoring time. Here, in FIG. 31, the blocker-on monitoring time of the address "F027 (H)" is read. The blocker-on monitoring time is set to a timer value "45" when the passage sensor 43a is turned on (when a medal is detected), and this timer value is subtracted every interrupt processing. Then, in the next step S132, it is determined whether or not the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed. Here, in FIG. 31, when the timer value of the address “F027 (H)” is “0”, it is determined that the blocker on monitoring time has elapsed, and when not “0”, the blocker on monitoring time has elapsed. I will not judge.

If it is determined that the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S133. If it is determined that the blocker-on monitoring time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S131 to perform processing for waiting until the time elapses.
Such control is performed to prevent the blocker 45 from inserting a medal. Specifically, if about 100 ms have elapsed since the passage sensor 43a detects the medal, the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a has already passed the blocker 45 (the medal has passed the passage on the medal return side) It can be determined that In other words, if the blocker 45 is driven within about 100 ms after the passage sensor 43a is turned on, the blocker 45 may pinch the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  In step S133, the main control board 50 prohibits an interrupt from this time point. As described above, while the main process is being performed, one timer interrupt process is performed every 2.235 ms, but after the process of “prohibit interruption” in step S133, the interruption prohibition is released. Control to not allow interrupts.

In the next step S134, the main control board 50 performs processing to turn on the blocker signal. This processing is processing for storing data for setting the D6 bit signal of the output port 0 to "1". Specifically, in the “blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data” of FIG. 30, the D6 bit (blocker signal) is set to “1”.
In the present embodiment, information is output from the output port by the interrupt processing (step S611 in FIG. 54 described later). That is, instead of turning on the D6 bit of output port 0 at the timing of step S134, blocker signal "1" is stored in "blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data" in step S134 which is the main processing, and an interrupt is generated. At the time of processing for outputting the output port 0 in the processing (step S611), the data is output based on the data stored in the RWM 53.

  In the next step S135, the blocker state flag is turned on. Here, in FIG. 25, processing is performed to turn on (“1”) the D2 bit of the medal management flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S136, where the cancellation of the interruption prohibition set in step S133, that is, the interruption is permitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the above, the reason for not generating an interrupt between the processes of steps S134 and S135 is as follows.
In the present embodiment, the blocker signal is turned on in step S134, and the blocker state is turned on in step S135. In this case, when an interrupt is inserted between step S134 and step S135, one is turned on and the other is turned off. Specifically, due to the interrupt process entered halfway, there is a mismatch that the on indication LED 79e does not output on (does not light up) despite outputting on to the blocker 45. That is, in order to avoid such a state and update both values at once, it is possible to perform control so as not to give a player confusion by prohibiting interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the processing is performed in the order of steps S134 and S135, but the order of steps S135 and S134 may be reversed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the blocker 45 is turned on after approximately 102 ms (“46” interruption) has elapsed since the passage sensor 43a detects the medal, and a medal passage is formed. The reason for this setting is that the blocker 45 is turned on at the moment when the inserted medal (the medal detected by the passage sensor 43a) reaches the blocker 45, and the medal is prevented from being caught in the blocker 45. Therefore, after the passage sensor 43a detects the medal, the blocker 45 is controlled not to be turned on until a predetermined time (a time in which the medal may be caught) has passed.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) in step S55 of FIG.
First, in step S151, the main control board 50 determines whether the signal of the setting key switch 12 is on. Here, in the rising data of the input port 1, it is determined whether or not the rising data of the setting key switch 12 is on ("1"). When it is on, the process proceeds to step S152, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S161. That is, in the medal insertion waiting state, when the setting key switch 12 is turned on (when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot), the setting confirmation mode is set, and the processing of step S152 to step S160 is executed. The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the current setting value is confirmed (the administrator visually confirms it), and the setting value can not be changed.

In the next step S152, the blocker 45 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 44). Thereby, even if the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is returned from the payout opening.
When the process of step S152 is executed, it is not determined in FIG. 31 whether or not the blocker off monitoring time has elapsed. This is because the possibility of performing setting confirmation while inserting a medal is low.
In the next step S153, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the start of setting value display. Then, in the next step S154, the control command set 1 is executed (the control command data at the start of setting value display is set).

  Next, in step S155, the main control board 50 performs a process of lighting the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5). Here, in the present embodiment, an LED display request flag (not shown) that determines which digit can be turned on is provided, and the bit corresponding to digit 5 in the LED display request flag is turned on ( Execute processing to set "1". Thereby, the set value display LED 73 can be turned on, and the present set value can be displayed. The process of actually turning on / off the set value display LED 73 is performed in the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.

  Next, in step S156, it is determined whether the signal of the setting key switch 12 is turned off. In this process, contrary to step S151, it is determined whether the falling data of the D3 bit of the input port 1 has become "1". If it is determined that the signal of the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S157, and the main control board 50 executes a process of turning off the setting value display LED 73.

Next, in step S158, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the end of the setting value display. Then, in the next step S159, the control command set 1 is executed (the control command data at the end of the setting value display is set).
In the next step S160, the main control board 50 performs a process (FIG. 41) to turn on the blocker. Next, proceeding to step S161, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the game standby display start time has passed the "26846" interrupt (about 60 seconds) set in step S81 of FIG. Here, in FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the timer values of the addresses “F02A (H)” and “F02B (H)” are “0” (here, “072C (H)” is an initial value. I shall remember.). When it is determined that it is "0", it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, and when it is not "0" it is determined that the game standby display start time has not elapsed.
When "082B (H)" obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "072C (H)" is stored as the timer value of the game standby display start time, the timer value is "00FF (H)". If it is less, it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S162, and processing for clearing the display of the number-of-gains display LED 78 is executed. This process is a process of updating the value of acquired sheet data to “0” in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S161 that the game standby display start time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game is not performed for a predetermined time, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 is cleared, but the stored number display LED 76, the bet displays LED 79a to 79c, and the replay display LED 79f are not cleared. It is configured as follows. As a result, it is continuously displayed that having the accountable stored number, betted, and possible to play again, so when the player once tries to leave the seat, the other player It is possible that the player does not feel that the player has finished the game. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantage of the player.

  In addition, even after the player has finished the game (settlement processing, etc. after leaving the game), the player continues to display the acquired number, so that the player has finished the game with respect to other players and hall-related persons. The winning number is cleared because it is confused with not feeling that there is not (the player may still be trying to play a game).

As described above, a timer of about 60 seconds is set at the start of the game by the process of steps S81 of FIG. 35 and steps S161 and S162 of FIG. Clear the display contents of the LED 78 (set it to "00").
Thus, for example, the winning number display LED 78 displays "00" while the reels 31 are rotating, or when the winning combination of the winning combination (whether or not the winning combination of the winning combination of the winning combination is made) It is a state. Further, for example, when the small winning combination 01 is won when all the reels 31 are stopped, the display of the number-of-gains display LED 78 changes from “00” to “09”.

Further, although detailed processing is omitted, when the medal is inserted (at the time of the maintenance bet of the medal and the medal automatically inserted at the time of the replay winning), the display of the acquired number is cleared.
In addition, since the above control is an example, control is performed so that nothing is displayed on the number-of-ears display LED 78, for example, when the combination is not winning when the reels 31 are rotating, when all the reels 31 stop. May be

Note that "clearing the display of the acquisition number display LED 78" means not only setting the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to "00" but also setting it to "* 0" or "**" ( “*” Indicates that the light is turned off, etc. In other words, it means changing from the display of the acquired number acquired by the player in the previous game to another predetermined display.
Also, in the case of a specification that does not execute the process (step S102 in FIG. 35) for turning off the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c indicating the number of bets for the previous game, when it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed, A clear process for turning off the bet display LEDs 79a to 79c (specifically, a process for clearing the D0 to D2 bits of the bet number display LED data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) of the address "F012 (H)" or the bet number display LED data ) May be executed.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in step S56 of FIG.
In FIG. 43, in step S171, the main control board 50 detects whether or not the blocker signal is on. If the blocker signal is on, the process proceeds to step S172. If the blocker signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S173. Here, "the blocker signal is on" corresponds to the case where the medal passage is formed by the blocker 45. Here, in FIG. 25, it is detected whether or not the D2 bit data of the medal management flag is on.

In step S172, the main control board 50 detects whether or not the data of the input sensor signal is on. Here, it is determined whether or not any of the D1 or D2 bits of the level data of the input port 2 is "1". If it is determined that the data of the insertion sensor signal is on, it means that the maintenance of the medal has been inserted, so the process proceeds to step S182, and the check process at the time of maintenance of the medal is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S173.
Although details of the maintenance medal check process in step S182 are not shown, this process determines whether or not the insertion sensors 1 and 2 correctly detect the passage of the medal, and determines that the medal is correctly detected. When the bet medal is stored, "1" is added to the bet medal or the stored medal. On the other hand, when the insertion sensors 1 and 2 do not correctly detect the passage of the medal, a predetermined error display process is executed. In addition, when executing the maintenance medal check process, the D0 bit of the medal management flag (address "F011 (H)") is set to "0". Thereby, it can be informed that the operation of the start switch 41 is not acceptable.

In step S173, a request for checking whether or not the bet operation of the 1-bet switch 40a and the 3-bet switch 40b and the settlement operation can be received is set. Then, in the next step S174, it is checked whether these operations can be accepted.
Next, proceeding to step S175, the main control board 50 determines whether or not operation acceptance is possible. If it is determined that the operation acceptance is possible, the process proceeds to step S176. If it is determined that the operation acceptance is not possible, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

It is determined whether or not the operation of 1 bet switch 40a, 3 bet switch 40b and settlement switch 46 can be received before the bet processing or settlement processing is performed by the process of steps S173 to S175 described above. Only in the case of the above state, the process is shifted to the bet process or the settlement process. For example, the level data and rising data of input port 0 are read by the processing of steps S173 to S175, and it is determined that the operation can not be accepted when the level data of input port 0 and the rising data do not match. .
In step S176, a confirmation request for the bet switch signal and the settlement switch signal is set. Here, rising data of input port 0 is read.

In the next step S177, based on the reading in step S176, it is determined whether any one of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the settlement switch 46 has risen. This process is a process of determining whether the D0, D1, and D2 bits of the rising data of the input port 0 read in step S173 are "1".
Specifically, for example, the rising data of the input port 0 read and "00000111 (B)" (definition data) are ANDed with each other to clear the D3 to D7 bits. Then, it is determined whether the calculation result is "0".
When the calculation result is "0", it is determined that there is no rise of any signal (that is, it is determined that none of the 1 bet switch 40a, the 3 bet switch 40b and the settlement switch 46 has a change in operation), The processing according to this flowchart is ended and the processing returns to the main processing.

  If it is determined in step S177 that the operation result is not "0", that is, if it is determined that there is a rise of any signal, the process proceeds to step S178. In step S178, the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is cleared. This processing is processing for setting the D0 bit of the medal management flag of FIG. 25 to “0”. When the D0 bit of the medal management flag is "0", the game start display LED 79d is extinguished to indicate that the start switch 41 is not enabled (or disabled even if operated). On the other hand, when the D0 bit of the medal management flag is "1", the game start display LED 79d is lighted to indicate that the start switch 41 is enabled. Note that the actual output of lighting / extinguishing of the game start display LED 79d is executed in the interrupt process (step S606 in FIG. 54).

Therefore, when there is a change in any one of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the settlement switch 46, the data of the medal management flag to notify that the acceptance of the start switch 41 is not permitted. Is updated, and a process based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b or the settlement switch 46 (in FIG. 43, the settlement process (MS_MEDAL_RET) in step S181 or the stored bet process in step S183) is executed.
The processing based on the start switch 41 (for example, the lottery process etc.) is executed in the main processing, and the settlement processing and the storage bet processing are also performed in the main processing. Is configured to not run.

Next, in step S179, the main control board 50 sets a confirmation request of data relating to the settlement switch signal. The process here is a process of confirming whether the D0 bit of the rising data of the input port 0 is “0” or “1”.
Then, in the next step S180, the main control board 50 determines whether or not there is a rise of the settlement switch signal based on the reading in step S179. In this processing, in the rising data of the input port 0, it is judged that there is no rising of the settlement switch signal when the D0 bit is "0", and when the D0 bit is "1", the rising of the settlement switch signal I judge that there is.

If it is determined that there is a rise of the settlement switch signal, the process proceeds to step S181, and the settlement process (M_MEDAL_RET: FIG. 45) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no rise of the settlement switch signal, it means that there is a rise of the bet switch signal, so the process proceeds to step S183, and the storage bet process is executed.
The detailed flowchart of the stored bet process is not shown. The stored bet process determines whether or not a stored medal is held, and in the case of having a stored medal, when a bet is possible, a bet process is executed.

In the above medal management process, it is determined in step S172 whether or not the data relating to the input sensor signal is on. If it is on, the maintenance medal check is performed, and if it is not on, the bet switch signal or It is determined whether data relating to the settlement switch signal is on.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal from being swallowed since the physical medal entry is preferentially checked over the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 46.

  Here, "preferentially checking that the physical medals are inserted compared to the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 46" is when looping through steps S53 to S58 of FIG. 34 and a blocker signal Under the on state, the interrupt processing updates the data of RWM 53 related to each input port, and either D1 or D2 bit level data of input port 2 is “1”, and D0, D1 or 0 of input port 0 A program that is easier to execute "maintenance medal check (step S182)" than "settlement processing (step S181)" or "stored bet processing (step S183)" when any of the D2 bit rising data is "1". Refers to order or program processing.

Further, in step S180, the rising data of the settlement switch 46 is confirmed, and the execution of the subsequent processing (the settlement processing or the storage bet processing) is determined.
As one of the reasons, in the present embodiment, two switches of 1 bet switch 40a and 3 bet switch 40b are provided as switches for executing the storage bet process, whereas a switch for executing the settlement process is provided. As only one of the settlement switches 46 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to determine the settlement process or the storage bet process only by determining whether or not the rising data of the D0 bit (specific bit) of the input port 0 is on. In other words, the process is simplified and the program capacity is reduced by determining that “D1 bit or D2 bit is on?”.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing blocker off processing (MS_BLOCKER_OFF) in step S152 etc. of FIG. As described above, when maintenance of medals becomes effective and maintenance of medals becomes impossible (cannot be received), blocker 45 is turned off, and the well-maintained medals are paid out from medal insertion slot 43. Control to form a medal passage to be returned from.

  First, in step S191, the main control board 50 performs blocker signal confirmation processing. Here, in FIG. 30, the D6 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is confirmed.

  Next, proceeding to step S192, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the blocker signal is off (the blocker signal data is “0”). If it is determined that it is not off, the process proceeds to step S193, and if it is determined that it is off, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. That is, when the blocker 45 is already off, the process according to the present flowchart is ended without advancing the main process of turning off the blocker 45.

When it is determined in step S192 that the blocker signal is not off, and the process proceeds to step S193, the main control board 50 prohibits an interrupt from this point.
In the next step S194, the main control board 50 performs processing to turn off the blocker signal. This process is a process for setting the D6 bit of the output port 0 to "0". Specifically, in the above blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data, the D6 bit is set to "0". As a result, the D6 bit of the output port 0 becomes "0" at the next interrupt processing. In the next step S195, processing is performed to turn off the blocker state. This process is a process for setting the D2 bit of the medal management flag to "0" in FIG.
Then, the process proceeds to step S196, and cancellation of the interruption prohibition set in step S193, that is, interruption is permitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the above process, the process of not generating an interrupt between the processes of steps S194 to S195 is the same as the process of blocker on.
That is, if an interrupt is inserted between the process of turning off the blocker signal and the process of turning off the blocker state, one is turned off and the other is turned on. In order to update the value of at once, interrupt processing is disabled.

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the settlement process (M_MEDAL_RET) in step S181 of FIG.
First, in step S211, it is determined whether the blocker off monitoring time has elapsed. In this judgment, it is judged whether or not the timer value of “F026 (H)” is “0” in FIG. 31. When it is judged that it is “0”, it is judged that the monitoring time has elapsed. If it is determined that the monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S211, and if it is determined that the monitoring time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart ends. Therefore, the settlement process is not performed until the blocker OFF monitoring time has elapsed. If it is determined that the blocker off monitoring time has not elapsed, the process is executed from step S57 in FIG.
In step S211, an output request at the start of settlement is set. This process is a process of storing information to be transmitted as a control command in the D register and the E register in order to transmit a control command to the effect of starting settlement, to the sub control board 80 as in step S70 of FIG. is there. Specifically, "21 (H)" is stored in the D register, and "55 (H)" is stored in the E register.

Next, in step S213, it is determined whether or not replaying is in progress. In this processing, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the operation state flag is "1" in FIG. 26, and when it is "1", it is determined that the replay operation is in progress. If it is determined that the replay operation is in progress, the process proceeds to step S224. If it is determined that the replay operation is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S214.
By this processing, when it is determined that it is not at the time of replay operation, the processing proceeds to the processing after step S214, and it becomes possible to settle bet medals. On the other hand, at the time of replay operation, since there is no bet medal which can be settled, the process proceeds to the processing of step S224 and subsequent steps in order to enable settlement of stored medals.

In step S214, bet medals are read. This process stores the address "F06B (H)" of the medal bet number data in FIG. 27 in the HL register, and further stores the data of the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the medal bet number data in the A register. Execute the process to
In the next step S215, it is determined whether or not it has a bet medal. In this process, it is determined that the bet medal is present when the A register value is not "0", and it is determined that the bet medal is not present when the A register value is "0". When it is determined that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S216, and when it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S224 (settlement processing for stored medals).

In step S216, blocker off processing (FIG. 44) is performed. That is, during the settlement process, the blocker 45 is turned off so as not to accept the medal input. Here, on the condition that it is determined that the blocker off monitoring time has elapsed in step S211, the process proceeds to step S216. Therefore, when the blocker off of step S216 is executed, the blocker off time monitoring time necessarily elapses.
At the next step S217, control command set 1 (FIG. 36) is executed. Thus, a control command to start settlement of bet medals is stored in the control command buffer. Further, by executing this control command set 1, the A register value and the HL register value are used in the control command set 2 (FIG. 37), and thus become different from the values set in step S214.

  In the next step S218, bet medals are read. This process is the same process as step S214. Since the A register value and the HL register value are different from those in the process of step S214 by the process of step S217, the address of the bet number data is again stored in the HL register as in the process of step S214. Stores the data of the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S219, one medal payout processing (M_1 MEDAL_PAY; FIGS. 46 to 47) is executed. This process is a process of driving the hopper motor 36 to pay out one actual medal from the hopper 35 while detecting the payout sensors 1 and 2.
Next, in step S220, bet medals are read. This process is the same as step S214. Since the HL register is used in the one medal payout process of step S219, after the end of step S219, the value is different from the HL register value set in step S218. Therefore, the bet medal is read again in step S220. (Process of storing the address of the bet number data in the HL register and storing the data of the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register).

In the next step S221, the bet medal number is decremented by "1". That is, "1" is subtracted from the A register value, and the A register value is stored in the address (F06B (H)) indicated by the HL register value. Thus, the medal bet amount data is updated. In the next step S222, bet number display data is generated. This process is a process of updating the bet number display LED signal data in FIG. The bet number display LED signal data corresponds to the bet number,
Number-of-bets display LED signal data (when one card is inserted): 00000001 (B)
Number-of-bets display LED signal data (when two are inserted): 00000011 (B)
Number-of-bets display LED signal data (when three are inserted): 00000111 (B)
It has become.
Therefore, immediately before step S222, when the bet number display LED signal data is "00000111 (B)" at the time of 3 bets, calculation is performed so as to become the bet number display LED signal data at the time of 2 bets. And "00000011 (B)". Here, by issuing an instruction to shift to the right by one (an instruction that is not a rotate), “00000111 (B)” → “00000011 (B)”.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S223, and it is determined whether the bet medals have been settled. In this process, it is determined whether the A register value stored at this time is "0", and if it is not "0", it is determined that the betting medals have not been settled. When it is "0", it is determined that the bet medals have been settled. If it is determined that the settlement of bet medals has not ended, the process returns to step S218, and the settlement of bet medals is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet medals have been settled, the process proceeds to step S234.

In addition, if it progresses to step S234, a settlement process will be complete | finished without performing a settlement of a storage medal after that. Therefore, when having a stored medal, the settlement switch 46 is operated again to perform the settlement process.
That is, in the example of FIG. 45, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, only settlement of bet medals is executed when the bet medal is held, and settlement of stored medals is not performed even when the accumulated medal is held. In this case, when the settlement switch 46 is operated again, the settlement process of stored medals is executed.
In addition to the two-step settlement process, when it is determined in step S223 that the bet medals have been settled, the process may proceed to step S224 to start settlement of stored medals. That is, when the settlement switch 46 is operated, when both the bet medals and the stored medals are included, the settlement process of all the medals may be executed.

If it is determined in step S213 that the replay operation is not in progress, or if it is determined in step S215 that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S224.
In step S224, stored sheet number data is acquired. In this process, the value of the address "F06F (H)" storing the stored sheet number display data in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register, and the data of the address indicated by the HL register value, ie, the stored sheet number display data It is processing to store in the A register. In the next step S225, it is determined whether or not there is a stored medal. This determination determines whether the A register value is "0". If it is determined that the stored medals are present, the process proceeds to step S226, and if it is determined that the stored medals are not present, the process according to the flowchart is ended.

In step S226, the blocker 45 is turned off as in step S216. Then, in the next step S227, the control command set 1 is executed as in step S217. This process is a process of storing the control command in the control command buffer in order to transmit the control command of stored medal settlement to the sub control board 80.
Next, the process proceeds to step S228, and a process of lighting the effect display LED 79g is performed. This processing is processing for setting the D4 bit of the medal management flag to "1" in FIG. The interrupt process (FIG. 54) is executed after the D4 bit of the medal management flag becomes “1”, and when it is time to light the digit 5, the effect display LED 79g is lighted in step S606.

  Next, proceeding to step S229, the stored sheet number display data is acquired again. Similar to step S224, this process stores the address "F06F (H)" of the stored number display data in the HL register and stores the data of the address indicated by the HL register value (stored number display data) in the A register. It is. Similarly to the above, since the control command set 1 is executed in step S227, the HL register value and the A register value are different from the time of step S224.

Next, the process proceeds to step S230, and one medal payout process (M_1 MEDAL_PAY; FIGS. 46 to 47) is executed as in step S219. Then, in the next step S231, "1" is subtracted from the stored sheet number display data. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the A register value and storing the A register value after subtraction in the address (F06F (H)) indicated by the HL register value. By this process, the stored sheet number display data is updated.
In the next step S232, it is determined whether the settlement of stored medals has ended. This processing air judges whether or not the A register value after subtraction is "0" in step S231, and when it is "0", it is judged that the settlement of stored medals is completed, and when it is not "0" Determines that the settlement of stored medals has not ended. If the settlement of stored medals has not ended, the process returns to step S229 to continue settlement of stored medals. On the other hand, when it is determined that the settlement of stored medals is finished, the process proceeds to step S233.

In step S233, the effect display LED is turned off. This process is the reverse of step S28. That is, in FIG. 25, processing is performed to set the D4 bit of the medal management flag to "0".
In the next step S234, the main control board 50 sets an output request at the end of the settlement. Specifically, “21 (H)” is stored in the D register, and “71 (H)” is stored in the E register. Then, in the next step S235, the control command set 1 is executed. Further, the process proceeds to the next step S236, and a process of turning on the blocker 45 (FIG. 41) is executed. Therefore, after the end of the settlement process, the blocker 45 is turned on, and medals can be inserted. Here, after the process of turning on the blocker 45, the process is executed from step S57 of FIG.

FIGS. 46 and 47 are flowcharts showing one medal payout processing (M_1MEDAL_PAY) in steps S219 and S230 in FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart following to FIG.
Before executing step S251, which is the start of the one medal payout process, although not shown in the flowchart, the AF register (A register and F register) is saved in the stack area (a part of the storage area of RWM 53). Then, before step S 273 described later, the AF register saved in the stack area is restored.
In step S251 of FIG. 46, the main control board 50 sets error non-detection. That is, in the initial state, a state in which no error is detected is set. In the next step S252, the main control board 50 sets a medal clogging error display request.
In the present embodiment, the medal clogging error is referred to as “HP error”, and when this medal clogging error occurs, processing is performed to display “HP” on the acquired number display LED 78.
Note that "error" here means a recoverable error. When a recoverable error occurs, the error content is displayed and the process is stopped. However, if the store clerk executes the error release operation (removes the cause of the error) and operates the reset switch 14, the error is released or not If it is determined that the error has been canceled, processing is resumed.

  Next, in step S253, the main control board 50 determines whether an error has been detected. If it is determined that an error is detected, the process proceeds to step S254 to display an error. Then, the process proceeds to step S255. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S253 that no error is detected, the process proceeds to step S255.

In step S255, the main control board 50 sets the control time of the medal payout device 35. This processing is performed by adding "2686 (D)" (or "255 (D)" to the medal payout device control time of the addresses "F028 (H)" and "F029 (H)" in FIG. D) ") is a process of setting. Here, when the medal payout device control time is set, “1” is subtracted after each interruption.
Next, at step S256, processing for driving the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is set to "1". As a result, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes "1" at the time of the next interrupt processing.
Then, in the next step S257, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout device control time has passed a predetermined time. In this process, whether or not the timer value of the medal payout device control time is "0" (when "FF (H)" is not added), or whether it is "00FF (H)" or less ( It is determined that "FF (H)" is added, and when it is "0" or less than "00FF (H)", respectively, it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed. If it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260. If it is determined that the medal payout device control time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S258.

  In step S260, processing for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is set to "0". As a result, at the time of the next interrupt processing, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes "0". Then, in the next step S261, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value "46" in the payout sensor check time of the address "F023 (H)" in FIG. Next, in step S262, it is determined whether the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on. Here, in FIG. 23, it is determined whether the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data has become “1”. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S255, and when it is determined that the signal is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S263.

In step S263, the main control board 50 determines whether the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has exceeded a predetermined time. In this process, it is determined whether or not the timer value (delivery sensor check time for the address "F023 (H)") set in step S261 has become "0", and if it is determined that it has become "0" It is determined that one hour of sensor has elapsed, and the process proceeds to step S264. On the other hand, when it is determined that the payout sensor 1 time has not become "0", the process returns to step S262.
In step S264, the main control board 50 sets a display request for a medal empty error. The medal empty error is referred to as "HE error" in the present embodiment, and when this medal empty error occurs, processing is executed to display "HE" on the acquisition number display LED 78. Then, the process proceeds from step S253 to step S254 to execute an error display.
That is, even when the hopper motor 36 is driven, when the payout sensor 1 does not detect the medal, it is determined that the hopper 35 has no medal.

In step S257, it is determined that the medal payout control time has elapsed, and in step S258, it is determined whether the payout sensor 1 signal has been turned on. Here, in FIG. 23, it is determined whether the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data has become “1”. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S259, and when it is determined that the signal is not turned on, the process returns to step S257.
In step S259, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value "46" in the payout sensor check time of the address "F023 (H)" in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S265.

In step S265, the main control board 50 determines whether a medal jam has been detected. In this process, when the timer value of the payout sensor 1 detection time set in step S259 becomes “0” before the on of the signals of the payout sensors 1 and 2 is detected in step S267 described later, a medal jam occurs. It is determined that it has been detected. If it is determined that a medal jam has been detected, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that a medal jam is not detected, the process proceeds to step S266.
In step S266, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 1 signal is on. Similar to step S258, this process determines whether the D3 bit of input port 2 level data is "1" in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is turned on, the process proceeds to step S267, and when it is determined that the signal is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S257.

In step S267, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the payout sensors 1 and 2 signals are on. This processing determines whether or not both the D3 bit and the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data are “1” in FIG. When it is determined that the payout sensors 1 and 2 signals are on (both bits are "1"), the process proceeds to step S268, and when it is determined that the payout sensors 1 and 2 signals are not on, the process returns to step S265.
In step S268, the detection time of the payout sensor 2 is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value "46" in the payout sensor check time of the address "F023 (H)" in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S269 (FIG. 47).

  In step S269, the main control board 50 determines whether a medal jam has been detected. In this process, when the timer value becomes “0” before detecting that the payout sensor 2 signal is off in step S270, or before detecting that the payout sensor 1 signal is off in step S272, the timer value When it becomes "0", it is determined that a medal jam is detected. If it is determined that a medal jam has been detected, the process proceeds to step S252. If it is determined that a medal jam is not detected, the process proceeds to step S270.

In step S270, it is determined whether the payout sensor 2 signal is turned off. This process determines whether the D4 bit of the input port 2 level data is "0" in FIG. If it is determined that the payout sensor 2 signal is off, the process proceeds to step S 271. If it is determined that the payout sensor 2 signal is not off, the process returns to step S 269.
In step S271, the main control board 50 determines whether medal payout is invalid. If it is determined that it is invalid, the process proceeds to step S257, and if it is determined that it is not invalid, the process proceeds to step S272. In step S272, the main control board 50 determines whether the payout sensor 1 signal is off. This process determines whether the D3 bit of the input port 2 level data is "0" in FIG. If it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is off, the process proceeds to step S273. If it is determined that the payout sensor 1 signal is not off, the process returns to step S269.

In step S273, the remaining payout number (count value) is decremented by one. As described above, the AF register saved in the stack area is restored before step S273. Then, in step S273, a process of subtracting "1" is performed on the data stored in the A register.
Next, in step S274, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the medal payout has been completed. In this process, it is determined whether the A register value after subtraction of "1" is "0", and when it is "0", it is determined that medal payout has ended.

  If it is determined that the medal payout has been completed, the process proceeds to step S275, and if it is determined that the medal payout is not completed, the present flowchart is ended. In step S275, the main control board 50 performs processing for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. Specifically, in FIG. 30, the D7 bit of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data is set to "0". As a result, the D7 bit of the output port 0 becomes "0" at the time of the next interrupt processing (the off signal is output as the hopper drive signal). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 46, when it is determined in step S257 that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260 to turn off the hopper motor drive signal, and then the payout sensor 1 detection time is set in step S261. did. Then, when the payout sensor 1 detection time has elapsed before detecting that the payout sensor 1 signal is on ("Yes" in step S263), the process proceeds to step S264 to set an HE error.
However, the present invention is not limited to the above process, and when it is determined in step S257 that the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S260 to turn off the hopper motor drive signal, and then proceeds to step S264 to perform the HE error. You may set it. That is, when the payout sensor 1 signal is not detected until the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the HE error may be immediately generated.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the start switch check process (M_START_CHK) in step S58 of FIG.
First, in step S281, it is determined whether the prescribed numbers match. In this processing, the number of medals bet at this time is read from the medal bet number data in FIG. 27, and it is determined whether or not "3", for example, in the normal game. If it is determined that the number of bets matches the specified number, the process proceeds to step S282, and if it is determined that the number does not match, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34). As a result of this processing, if the specified number of medals have not been betted, the start switch check processing is not progressed (the game is not started) even if the start switch 41 is operated.

In step S282, it is determined whether the blocker off monitoring time has elapsed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address "F011 (H)" of the medal management flag is stored in the HL register in FIG.
(2) In FIG. 31, it is determined whether or not the timer value of blocker off monitoring time at address "F026 (H)" is "0", and if it is "0", blocker off monitoring time has elapsed. to decide.
If it is determined that the blocker off monitoring time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S284. If it is determined that the blocker off monitoring time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S283.
In step S283, the game start display LED signal is turned off. This processing is processing for setting the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D0 bit of “F011 (H)” in FIG. 25 to “0”. Then, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34).

On the other hand, it is determined in step S282 that the blocker off time monitoring time has elapsed, and if the process proceeds to step S284, the game start display LED signal is turned on. This processing is processing for setting the address indicated by the HL register value, that is, the D0 bit of “F011 (H)” to “1”. Then, the process returns to step S53 (FIG. 34).
Next, in step S285, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. In this processing, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit of the input port 0 rising data is "1" in FIG. 21, and when it is "1", it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL; FIG. 49) of step S59. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S53.

  When the process proceeds to start switch reception in step S59, the blocker 45 is turned off in step S294 in FIG. Therefore, the blocker 45 is turned off on the condition that it is determined in step S282 that the blocker off monitoring time has elapsed. Therefore, in the flow of FIG. 49, it is not determined whether or not the blocker off monitoring time has elapsed immediately before executing the blocker off in step S294.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL) in step S59 in FIG. 34 and FIG.
In step S291, the built-in random number is stored in a register (random number soft latch register) of the MPU. Here, the random number is latched (acquired), and it is step S60 in FIG. 34 to determine whether the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to the winning combination.
In the next step S292, the start switch acceptance permission flag is cleared. That is, in FIG. 25, the D0 bit of the medal management flag is cleared (set to “0”).
Next, at step S293, the setting change permission flag is cleared. In this process, the D6 bit of the medal management flag is set to "1" in FIG. This makes the setting change impossible.

In the next step S294, the blocker 45 is turned off (FIG. 44). That is, after the start switch 41 is operated, control is performed so as not to receive a medal even if it is inserted. In the next step S295, bet medals are read. The number of bet medals read here is stored in the A register. In the next step S296, the main control board 50 sets the output request of the reel rotation disclosure. Here, “13 (H)” is set in the D register.
In step S297, the number of bet medals (register A value) read in step S295 is set in the register E.

In the next step S298, control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the information of the D register and the E register set in steps S296 and S297 in the control command buffer.
Next, in step S299, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value stored at the predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 is within the normal range (1 to 6). If it is determined that the range is the normal range, the process proceeds to step S300. If it is determined that the range is not the normal range, the process proceeds to step S305 to execute return impossible error processing (error E6).

In step S300, bet medals are read. Then, the read bet medal number is stored in the A register. Although the bet medal is read in step S295, since the A register value changes according to the control command set 1 in step S298, the bet medal is read again.
When a replay is won, the number of medals automatically betted is set as the number of bet medals. Next, in step S301, the number of bet medals read is doubled. This process is a process of adding the A register value and the A register value, and storing the value after the addition in the A register. Further, the address (F 070 (H)) of the medal bet signal output frequency in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S302, interrupt processing is inhibited. Next, at step S303, the number of medal bet signal outputs is set. In this process, the value (the number of medal bet signal output times) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is added to the A register (the number of bet medals after doubling), and the value after the addition is stored in the A register Processing. Furthermore, the value of the A register is stored in the address (F 070 (H)) indicated by the HL register value. As a result, the medal bet signal output number is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S304, the interrupt process is permitted, and the process of this flowchart ends.

  The above-described processes of steps S302 to S304 prohibit interrupts before and after updating the medal bet signal output number. By prohibiting the interruption, it is possible to prevent the interruption process from being executed during the update of the medal bet signal and the process of updating the number of times of outputting the medal bet signal from being executed. That is, after the processing for updating the medal bet signal output frequency is completed, the interrupt processing is permitted and the update of the medal bet signal is permitted.

  Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the medal bet signal is output, the actual number of medal bets is calculated twice, and the value is set as the number of times of output. As described above, when the medal bet signal is output to the outside as a pulse signal that repeatedly turns on and off, one medal bet number of on and off is represented as described above. To control. The same applies to the medal payout. When the medal payout signal is output to the outside, the medal payout number is calculated twice, and the value is set to the medal payout signal output count so that one medal payout number is represented by two times of on and off. Control.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the preparation for starting the reel rotation (M_REEL_READY) in step S63 in FIG.
In step S311, it is determined whether the minimum game period has elapsed. In this process, whether or not the timer value of the minimum gaming time of the addresses "F02C (H)" and "F02D (H)" in FIG. 31 is "0"("FF(H)" is not added. It is a process to determine whether or not “00FF (H)” or less (when “FF (H)” is added) or “00FF (H)” or less. In the present embodiment, about 4.1 seconds are set as the minimum game time (minimum time from the start of rotation of the reel 31 to the start of rotation of the reel 31 in the next game).

  If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S312, and the minimum game time is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value of the minimum game time to the addresses "F02C (H)" and "F02D (H)" in FIG. As described above, the timer value to be set is “072 C (H)” corresponding to “1836 (D)”, or “082 B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to this value (2091 Corresponding to (D)). Therefore, when the minimum game time is set in step S312, the timer value is decremented by "1" for each interrupt from this time, and it is determined whether the timer value is "0" in step S311 in the next game ((0) It is determined whether "FF (H)" is not added or "00FF (H)" or less (when "FF (H)" is added).

In the next step S313, the condition device number is acquired. This process stores the item condition device number of the address "F084 (H)" in FIG. 28 in the H register, and stores the winning and replay condition device number of the address "F083 (H)" in the L register. It is a process.
In the condition device information output bit set in the next step S314, the D7 bit of the H register is set to "1", and the D6 bit of the L register is set to "1". This process is a process of creating item condition device information from the item condition device number and creating winning and replay condition device information from the winning and replay condition device numbers.
In the present embodiment, when the D7 bit is “1” in the upper 2 bits of the condition device information, it indicates that it is a character object condition device information, and when the D6 bit is “1”, winning and replay are performed. The condition device information is set to point (see FIG. 29).

Next, proceeding to step S315, storage processing of the conditional device information is performed. In this process, the H register value is stored in the item condition device information of the address "F092 (H)" in FIG. 29, and the L register value is stored in the winning and replay condition device information of the address "F091 (H)". It is processing to memorize.
Next, proceeding to step S316, the condition device information output time is stored. This process is a process of storing the timer value "25" in the condition device output time of the address "F024 (H)" in FIG. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the character article condition device information and the winning and replay condition device information are output to the outside (test machine) during “24 × 2.235 ms = 53.64 ms”. The condition device output time set here is subtracted by “1” at step S605 described later from the next interrupt processing (FIG. 54).
Condition device information is information to be output to a test machine, and is not actually output in the market. However, the ROM 54 storing program processing necessary for outputting, RWM 53 (storage area) capable of storing information as source of conditional device information and conditional device information output time is also provided in the slot machine 10 in the market. ing. In other words, although processing for outputting the conditional device information is executed by the ROM 54 and RWM 53 provided in the slot machine 10 in the market, the conditional device information is not output.

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control (M_REEL_STOP) in step S65 in FIG.
First, in step S321, the number of shifted frames is created. The number of shifted frames is synonymous with the number of sliding frames. This process is created based on the lottery result (winning number) of the combination (conditional device) by the combination lottery means 61 before the stop acceptance is executed. Also, it is created for all stop symbol numbers that may be accepted for stop.

Although not shown, the RWM 53 has storage areas with a total of 60 (60 bytes) number of shifted frames for all the symbol numbers 20 (0 to 19) for three reels 31.
And, in principle, a value obtained by adding the number of shifted frames to the stop acceptance symbol number is the stop symbol number.
Also, for example, after the left reel is stopped, the number of shifted frames of the middle reel and the right reel is recreated based on the stop acceptance symbol number or the stop symbol number of the left reel.

In the next step S322, it is determined whether or not stop acceptance is possible. In this process, “0” to “0” for the left reel symbol number (for passing position), the middle reel symbol number (for passing position), and the right reel symbol number (for passing position) in FIG. Check whether symbol number of 19 (D) is stored, and if symbol number of "0" to "19 (D)" is stored, judge "Yes" and "FF (H (H)" When ")" is stored, it is judged as "No". As described above, in the reel symbol number (for passing position), "FF (H)" is stored when the reel sensor has not passed.
If it is determined in step S322 that stop acceptance is possible, the process proceeds to step S323. If it is determined that stop acceptance is not possible, the process proceeds to step S328.
In step S323, it is determined whether the reel stop acceptance standby time has elapsed. In this processing, the reel stop acceptance standby time at the address "F022 (H)" in FIG. 31 is read, and when the timer value is "0", it is determined that the standby time has elapsed. If it is determined that the standby time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S324, and if it is determined that the standby time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to 328. During this waiting time, the new number of shifted frames and the like are calculated, and the calculated number of shifted frames can be stored in the RWM 53.

In step S324, it is determined whether the rising of the stop switch signal has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D5 to D7 bits of the input port 0 rising data are "1" in FIG. 21, and when any one is determined to be "1", the stop switch 42 Judge that it has been operated. If it is determined that the rising of the stop switch signal is detected, the process proceeds to step S326, and if it is determined that the rising of the stop switch signal is not detected, the process proceeds to step S325.
In step S325, it is determined whether the stop operation of all the reels 31 has been performed. When it is determined that the stop operation of all the reels 31 has been performed, the process proceeds to step S328, and when it is determined that the stop operation of all the reels 31 is not performed, the process returns to step S324.

  When the process proceeds from step S324 to step S326, the reel stop acceptance start time is set. This processing is processing for setting "7" to the reel stop acceptance standby time of the address "F022 (H)" in FIG. Therefore, when "7" is set to the reel stop acceptance standby time at this time, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt in the subsequent interrupt processing. Then, until the reel stop acceptance standby time becomes "0", it is judged "No" at Step S323, and after it becomes "0", it is judged "Yes" at Step S323.

  After step S326, the process proceeds to step S327 to save the stop position. This processing is processing for storing reel symbol numbers (for the stop position) in FIG. 28 for the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42. As described above, a value obtained by adding the number of shifted frames to the stop acceptance symbol number is taken as a stop symbol number. Therefore, step S327 is performed for all the left, middle and right reels 31, and each time the left, middle and right stop switches 42 are operated, the left reel symbol number (in FIG. 28) The stop position), the middle reel symbol number (for the stop position), and the right reel symbol number (for the stop position) are stored.

  Next, proceeding to step S328, the stop states of all the reels are checked. In this process, it is determined whether the status of all the reels 31 is in the stopped state. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the rotating reel 31 does not stop at that moment but stops after the motor 32 is decelerated. Therefore, in step S328, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 have come to a stop regardless of whether they have actually stopped. Whether or not all the reels 31 have actually stopped is determined in the next step S329.

In the next step S329, it is checked whether all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped (the status of all reels is in a stopped state), the processing according to this flowchart ends, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S321.
Here, as described above, in the first step S321 of creating the number of shifted frames, all symbol numbers of the left, middle and right reels 31 are created, but any one stop switch 42 is operated, When the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is stopped, when the process returns from step S329 to step S321, the number of shifted symbols is newly created again for all symbol numbers of the remaining reels.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S68 of FIG.
First, in step S341, an output request at the time of medal payout start is set. This process is a process of storing information indicating the number of obtained (payout) sheets in a predetermined register. Specifically, it is a process of storing “22 (H)” in the D register and the number of obtained (payout) sheets in the E register. At the next step S342, control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the control command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53.
Next, at step S343, the medal number setting process is executed. This process executes the following process.
(1) The medal payout number data of the address "F06C (H)" in FIG. 27 is stored in the D register.
(2) The medal bet number data of the address "F06B (H)" in FIG. 27 is stored in the E register.
In the next step S344, the operation flag is checked. This process is a process of determining on / off of each bit of the operation state flag in FIG.

Next, in step S345, it is determined whether 1BB is in operation. In the present embodiment, the 1BB operation state flag is determined depending on whether the D3 bit of the operation state flag is “1”. If it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is "1", the process proceeds to step S346, and if it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is not "1", the process proceeds to step S350.
In step S346, data on the obtainable number of sheets at the time of 1BB operation is acquired. This processing is processing for storing data of the obtainable number of sheets at the time of 1BB operation stored in a predetermined address (not shown) of the RWM 53 in the A register. Then, in the next step S347, it is determined whether or not the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation has reached the upper limit value. Here, the information stored in register A (the medal payout data) is subtracted from the value stored in register A, the calculation result is stored in register A, and the value stored in register A is not negative (carry flag ≠ “1 ") Determine whether or not. If it is determined that the value is not negative, it is determined that the result is "No" (the upper limit of the number of sheets acquired at the time of 1BB operation has not been reached).

If it is determined that the upper limit value for the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation has been reached, the process proceeds to step S348, and if it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached, the process proceeds to step S349.
In step S348, the number of obtainable sheets at the time of 1BB operation is cleared. This process is a process of performing an "XOR" operation on the A register value and the A register value, and storing the operation result in the A register. Due to this arithmetic processing, the A register value is always "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S349.
In step S349, the obtainable number of sheets at the time of 1BB operation is updated. Specifically, the A register value is stored in the obtainable number of sheets at the time of 1BB operation of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S350.

In step S350, a set process of medal payout number is performed. This process is a process of storing the E register value (the medal bet number data) in the A register. Thereby, the medal bet number data is stored in the A register.
In the next step S251, it is determined whether or not replay is displayed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the D0 bit (replay) of the symbol combination display flag in FIG. 26 is "1". When the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is "1" (during replay display), the process proceeds to step S353, and when it is determined that replay is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S352.

In step S352, a set process of medal payout number is performed. This process is a process of storing the D register value (the medal payout number data) in the A register. Thus, the medal payout number data is stored in the A register.
By the above processing, the A register value becomes the medal bet number data value set in step S343 at the time of replay winning, and when it is not at the time of replay winning (ie, at the time of winning a small winning combination) It becomes the set medal payout number data value.
Next, proceeding to step S353, processing for doubling the number of medals stored in the A register is executed. The reason for doubling is to transmit the doubled payout signal, as described above. This process is a process of adding the A register value and the A register value, and storing the value after the addition in the A register. Further, the address of the medal payout signal output frequency, that is, "F071 (H)" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the HL register.

Next, at step S354, interrupt processing is inhibited. In the next step S355, the number of medal payout signal outputs is set. This process is a process of adding the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value and the A register value, and storing the value after the addition in the A register. By this process, the value of the medal payout signal output number is updated. In the next step S356, interrupt processing is permitted.
By the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited before and after updating the value of the number of times of medal payout signal output.
By prohibiting the interruption, it is possible to prevent the interruption process from being executed during the update of the medal payout signal and the process of updating the medal payout signal output frequency from being executed. That is, after completion of the process of updating the medal payout signal output frequency, the interrupt process is permitted and the update of the medal payout signal is permitted.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, although the payout number of medals is set to 10 at the maximum, there is a possibility that the payout number in the next game will be updated while the medal payout signal is output accompanying the payout of 10 sheets. Low. However, if the medal payout number is changed in the development process (for example, the maximum payout number is changed from 10 to 15, etc.), the payout number may be updated while the medal payout signal is being output. There is. Here, if interrupt prohibition processing is provided as in the present embodiment, program changes can be reduced even if the number of medals paid out (for example, to a maximum of 15) is changed during development.

  Further, in step S355, it is significant to set the number of medal payout signal outputs before the actual medal payout process. Specifically, the medal payout signal output frequency is created from the medal payout number data except at the time of replay winning. At this time, if the payout process (step S357 or later in FIG. 52) is performed before setting the medal payout signal output frequency, the medal payout number data is updated, and the medal payout signal for the correct frequency is not output. There is a risk of

In the next step S357, it is determined whether or not there is a medal payout. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the D register value (the medal payout number data), and it is determined whether the value after subtraction is “0”. When it is "0", it is determined that there is no medal payout. If it is determined that the medal payout is determined, the process proceeds to step S358. If it is determined that the medal payout is not determined, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S358, the number of stored sheets is read. This process is a process of reading the value of the stored sheet number display data at the address "F06F (H)" in FIG. Next, in step S359, it is determined whether the number of stored medals reaches the limit value. When the value of the stored sheet number display data read is "50", it is determined that the stored sheet number is at the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S363. When it is determined that the stored sheet number is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S360. move on.

In step S360, the standby time at the time of accumulated medal addition is set. In this embodiment, as in step S115 of FIG. 38, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the count value “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. Therefore, "00000000 (B)" is set in the B register and "00101110 (B)" is set in the C register. Next, proceeding to step S361, a 2-byte time wait process (FIG. 39) is executed. As described above, this process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt and waiting until it becomes "0". When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S361 is completed, the process proceeds to step S362, and one stored sheet number is added. This process is a process of adding "1" to the stored sheet number display data of the address "F06F (H)" in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S364.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S359 to step S363, one medal payout process (FIG. 46) is executed. By the above processing, the number of stored sheets (stored number display data) is added until the number of stored sheets reaches the limit value, and when the number of stored sheets reaches the limit value, a process of paying out the actual medal from the hopper 35 (medal Execute 1 sheet payout process).

In step S364, the acquisition number display is set to "+1". This process is a process of adding "1" to the acquired sheet number data in FIG. Thereby, for example, when the display until then is "02", the display is updated to "03".
In the next step S365, a process of subtracting "1" from the medal payout number data in FIG. 27 is performed. Next, in step S366, it is determined whether medal payout has been completed. In this process, it is determined whether the updated medal payout number data has become "0". If it is determined that the medal payout number data is "0", the process proceeds to step S367. If it is determined that the medal payout number data is not "0", the process returns to step S358.

  In step S367, an output request at the end of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing in the register a command indicating the end of medal payout. At the next step S368, control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the control command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the above-described payout processing, when a payout for adding one stored sheet number is performed, the standby time for about 100 ms is set by the processing in steps S361 and S362. Thereby, the player can be shown to count up the stored number display LED 76. For example, when the display of the storage number display LED 76 before storage addition is “08” and nine medals are stored and added to this, “display“ 08 ”→ wait processing of 100 ms → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms Weight processing of ... → → 100 ms weight processing → display "17". On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when the number of stored sheets is one, the display "08" is instantly changed to the display "17".
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of stored sheets, a two-byte time waiting process is performed for each addition so that a payout sound ("Plurl ...) output from the sub control board 80 side. Can be synchronized with the count-up of the stored number.

On the other hand, when the number of stored sheets exceeds the maximum number “50” and the medals are actually paid out in the processes after step S363, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S360 and S371 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay it out, as described above, it takes about 100 ms to pay out one sheet. As a result, since the payout time per medal is about 100 ms, when an actual medal is paid out, a 2-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when the medals are actually paid out, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub control board 80 side without providing the 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) in step S69 of FIG.
In step S 381, processing is performed to clear the flag (also referred to as winning information) of the condition device. This processing is processing for clearing other than the special combination condition device, and when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the effective line, processing is also performed to clear the special combination condition device. In the next step S 382, the process of turning off the replay display LED is performed. This process corresponds to the process of setting the D3 bit of the medal management flag to "0" in FIG. Next, in step S383, the replay operation flag is cleared. This process is a process of setting the D0 bit of the operation state flag to "0" in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 54 in a cycle of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process of FIG. In other words, the interrupt process of FIG. 54 can be executed at a predetermined cycle. Although the interrupt cycle is 2.235 ms in this embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this cycle.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, as an initial process, save processing of the register value and prohibition process of the overlap interrupt are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing is used in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is done because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be issued while the power-off process is being performed.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not a power off has been detected. Here, when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value by the voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) provided on main control board 50 (not shown), power is supplied to bit D0 of input port 2 in FIG. Since the disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
Then, when the power-off is detected, the process proceeds to the power-off process of step S619, and when it is determined that the power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the interrupt counter value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the interrupt counter value in FIG.
In the next step S605, timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT; FIG. 55) is performed. This process is a process of updating (such as subtracting) all timer values shown in FIG.
Next, in step S606, LED display control is performed. This process is a process of lighting the set value, the number of stored sheets, the number of acquired sheets, the error display content (error code), and the like according to the state of the slot machine 10 using the 7-segment LED (digits 1 to 5).

  In the non-returnable error shown in step S72 in FIG. 34 or in FIG. 54 in step S620, an error display is output by the main processing, but the setting value during setting change or setting confirmation, number of stored sheets, number of acquired sheets, The display of the recoverable error is performed by the LED display control in step S606 every time the interrupt processing is performed.

  Next, in step S607, the input port 0 to 2 (FIG. 18) is read. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals of various sensors are read, and data based on the input ports 0 to 2 (level data, rising) Data, falling data (FIGS. 21 to 23) are generated and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. In the next step S608, the built-in random number is checked. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is turned on.

  Specifically, for example, when a clock frequency abnormality (for example, when the update of the random number is late) of the random number for the role lottery is detected, the error flag is turned on. More specifically, SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHz) input to the MPU are provided, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied, the error flag is turned on.

  Then, in step S609, it is determined whether or not an error occurs in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that an error does not occur, the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S620 to shift to an unreturnable error process. The error display content at this time is "E7".

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed on a reel 31 basis (left, middle, right), and may be stopped, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby depending on the operation state. When drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611, and port output processing is performed. In this process, excitation output of the motor 32 and the hopper motor 36 and excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S612, a passage sensor check (PATHSEN_CHK; FIG. 56) is performed. This process is a process of detecting whether or not the passage sensor 43a has risen, and setting a timer value related to the blocker 45 based on the detection result.
In the next step S613, control command transmission is performed. This process outputs, for example, from output ports 5 and 6, a control command (unsent control command stored in the control command buffer of RWM 53) set by output request set and control command set 1, for example, output port 8 This is a process of transmitting data from the output port 8 with the bit (for example, D4 bit) corresponding to the data strobe signal (not shown) set to “1” to the sub control board 80.

Here, the “data strobe signal” is a signal to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 together with the sub control data signals 1 to 16. When receiving the data strobe signal, sub control substrate 80 controls to acquire data of sub control data signals 1 to 16 from a buffer provided in sub control substrate 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
When a control command is set in the control command buffer in the output request set and control command set 1, interrupt processing after that point (if the control command buffer is empty, in principle, interrupt processing that comes after that point) ), The control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in this step S613. Then, after the output processing from the output ports 5 and 6 is executed, the data trove signal (for example, D4 bit) of the output port 8 is set to "0".

  In next step S614, external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL; FIG. 57) is performed, and in next step S615, external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT; FIG. 58) is performed. These processes are processes of setting (store in a register) output data of an external signal output from the output port 4 and transmitting a signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100 shown in FIG.

In the next step S616, conditional device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT; FIG. 59) is performed. This processing is a test machine for determining whether the slot machine 10 is properly designed in accordance with the law by writing (setting) the data to the output port 7 based on the data stored in the RWM 53. It is a process of transmitting a condition device signal as a test signal.
Next, in step S617, random number update processing is performed. In the next step S618, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As shown in the above processing, the on / off of the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79g), and the setting value display LED 73 is controlled by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms. In addition, since dynamic lighting is performed on the digits 1 to 5, lighting processing is performed on any one digit in the LED display control of step S606. Therefore, the lighting timing of the digit comes once every five interrupts.
Furthermore, when the control command not yet transmitted to the sub control board 80 is stored in the control command buffer for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed at the time of unrecoverable error processing.
A non-returnable error is a serious error that can not normally occur, and processing such as update of RWM 53 data based on data from input port or transmission of control command to sub control board 80 is performed based on abnormal data. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is disabled.
In other words, since the control command is not transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 at the time of non-returnable error, it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1.
Furthermore, when a control command that has not been sent is stored in the buffer of the control command when a non-returnable error occurs, the control command is not sent to the sub control board 80. This is because there is a possibility that the control command stored in the control buffer may not be correct.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) shown in step S605 in FIG.
In step S631, the measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address indicates a reference address. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, "F021 (H)" is a reference address. Therefore, in step S631, "F021 (H)" is set in the HL register.

  Next, proceeding to step S632, the 1-byte timer number is set in the B register. The 1-byte timer number indicates the number of 1-byte timers in FIG. As shown in FIG. 31, the 1-byte timer has a total of seven “F021 (H)” to “F027 (H)”. Therefore, here, “7” is set in the B register.

  In the next step S633, the 1-byte timer value is updated. The process here subtracts “1” from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. For example, when "46 (D)" is stored in "F021 (H)", "45 (D)" is obtained. Further, as a result of subtracting “1”, when a borrow occurs (ie, when the value before subtraction is “0”), “0” is stored.

Next, proceeding to step S634, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.
In the next step S635, it is determined whether one-byte timer measurement has ended. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the B register value, and determining whether the B register value after subtraction is “0”. If the B register value after subtraction is not "0", it is determined that one-byte timer measurement has not ended.
If it is determined that the one-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S636. If it is determined that the one-byte timer measurement is not completed, the process proceeds to step S633.
By repeating the above steps S633 to 635, all seven 1-byte timers are decremented by "1". However, as described above, if "0" is stored as the 1-byte timer value, 0 "is maintained.).

In step S636, the 2-byte timer number is set in the B register. This process is a process of setting the number of 2-byte timers in FIG. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 31, since there are three 2-byte timers, "3" is stored in the B register.
In the next step S637, the 2-byte timer value is updated. In this process, “1” is subtracted from 2-byte data in which the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is the lower digit and the address value indicated by “HL register value + 1” is the upper digit.
A specific example is as follows.
(1) Example 1
HL register value = F028 (H) (the same applies hereinafter),
F028 (H) = 05 (H)
F 029 (H) = 01 (H)
When you subtract "1" when
F028 (H) = 04 (H)
F 029 (H) = 01 (H)
It becomes.

(2) Example 2
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F 029 (H) = 01 (H)
When you subtract "1" when
F028 (H) = FF (H)
F 029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.
(3) Example 3
F028 (H) = 50 (H)
F 029 (H) = 00 (H)
When you subtract "1" when
F028 (H) = 4F (H)
F 029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.

(4) Example 4
F028 (H) = 01 (H)
F 029 (H) = 00 (H)
When you subtract "1" when
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F 029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.
(5) Example 5
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F 029 (H) = 00 (H)
When you subtract "1" when
F028 (H) = 00 (H)
F 029 (H) = 00 (H)
It becomes.

In the next step S638, the next timer address is set. In this process, "1" is added to the HL register value, and "1" is added to the HL register value. Thus, the HL register value is incremented by "2." In other words, since the address indicated by the HL register value is shifted by two, for example, when "F028 (H)" has been specified, "F02A (H)" is specified by the calculation.
In the next step S639, it is determined whether or not the 2-byte timer measurement has ended. This process subtracts "1" from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is not "0", it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not ended. If it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S637, and if it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has ended, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
By repeating the above steps S637 to 639, all three 2-byte timers are decremented by "1". However, as described above, if "0" is stored as the 2-byte timer value, 0 "is maintained.).

As described above, by continuously arranging the addresses of the 1-byte timers, the timer values stored in the addresses of the 1-byte timers can be sequentially updated only by looping the processes of steps S633 to S635.
Similarly, by continuously arranging the addresses of the 2-byte timers, the timer values stored in the addresses of the 2-byte timers can be sequentially updated only by looping the processes of steps S637 to S639. Thereby, the program capacity can be reduced in the process of updating the timer.
In addition, the storage area (F021 (H) to F027 (H)) of the 1-byte timer and the storage area (F028 (H) to F02D (H)) of the 2-byte timer are contiguous to store the address in the HL register. The processing to be performed is only required once (step S631 in FIG. 55), and thereafter, the HL register value is incremented by “+1” or “+2” (the process of incrementing the HL register value by “+1” is repeated twice) Since the address to which the timer value is to be updated can be specified, the program capacity can be reduced in the timer update process.
Specifically, a program that stores an address in the HL register is an instruction that requires 3 bytes as a storage area of the ROM 54, but a program that "+1" the HL register value is an instruction that requires 1 byte as a storage area of the ROM 54. Yes, a program that "+2" the HL register value is an instruction requiring only 2 bytes as a storage area of the ROM 54. Note that these effects also apply to the second embodiment (modification) described later.

As described in FIG. 31, for the 1-byte timer, in the case of the reel stop acceptance standby time of the predetermined value which is determined in advance, for example, “F022 (H)”, “7 (H Set ").
On the other hand, for the 2-byte timer, for example, in the case of the minimum game time, "072C (H)" corresponding to "1836 (D)" is set in step S312 in FIG. 50, "072C There are cases where "082B (H)" obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "H" is set.
In the former case, when the timer value becomes "0", in FIG. 50, it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed in step S311. This point is the same as the one-byte timer.

Here, when "072C (H)" is set as the minimum game time, "2C (H)" is stored in "F02C (H)" (lower digit), and "7 (H)" is stored in "F02D (H)". H) "(upper digit) is stored.
And, when updating the minimum game time, 2 bytes each consisting of "F02C (H)" (lower digit) and "F02D (H)" (upper digit) every interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) Subtract “1” from the data of.
In addition, when it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has passed, when the 2-byte data is “0” (specifically, the data stored in “F02C (H)” (lower digit) is L Store in the register, store the data stored in "F02D (H)" (upper digit) in the H register, and the HL register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), minimum game time I judge that it has passed.

On the other hand, when setting "082B (H)" obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "072C (H)" as the minimum game time, "2B (H)" is set to "F02C (H)" ( The lower digit) is stored, and "8 (H)" is stored in "F02D (H)" (upper digit).
And, when updating the minimum game time, 2 bytes each consisting of "F02C (H)" (lower digit) and "F02D (H)" (upper digit) every interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) Subtract “1” from the data of.
In addition, when it is determined whether the minimum game time has passed, when the 1-byte data of the high-order digit is "0" (specifically, the data stored in "F02D (H)" (high-order digit) is " It is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (when the flag is “0” (zero flag = “1”)).

The other two-byte timers are similar to the above.
In FIG. 31, “0E7E (H)” not adding “FF (H)” is set for the medal payout device control time of the addresses “F028 (H)” and “F029 (H)”, “7E ( H) is stored in “F 028 (H)” (lower digit), and “A (H)” is stored in “F 029 (H)” (upper digit).
Then, when updating the medal payout device control time, each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) consists of "F028 (H)" (lower digit) and "F029 (H)" (upper digit) Subtract 1 from 2-byte data.
In addition, when it is determined whether or not the medal payout device control time has elapsed, when the 2-byte data is "0" (specifically, the data stored in "F028 (H)" (lower digit) Is stored in the L register, the data stored in “F 029 (H)” (upper digit) is stored in the H register, and the HL register value is “0” (zero flag = “1”), medal payout It is determined that the device control time has elapsed.

On the other hand, when setting "0B7D (H)" obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "0A7E (H)" as the medal payout device control time, "7D (H)" is set to "F028 (H)" (Lower digit), and stores "B (H)" in "F029 (H)" (upper digit).
Then, when updating the medal payout device control time, each interrupt (every time the timer measurement process is executed) consists of "F028 (H)" (lower digit) and "F029 (H)" (upper digit) Subtract 1 from 2-byte data.
In addition, when it is determined whether the medal payout device control time has elapsed, the data stored in “F029 (H)” (upper digit) when the 1-byte data of the upper digit is “0” (specifically, Is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the medal payout device control time has elapsed.

Similarly, when setting "68 DE (H)" to which "FF (H)" is not added for the game standby display start times of the addresses "F02 A (H)" and "F02 B (H)" in FIG. “DE (H)” is stored in “F02A (H)” (lower digit), and “68 (H)” is stored in “F02B (H)” (upper digit).
And, when updating the game standby display start time, every interruption (every time the timer measurement process is executed), it consists of "F02A (H)" (lower digit) and "F02B (H)" (upper digit) Subtract 1 from 2-byte data.
Also, when it is determined whether or not the game standby display start time has elapsed, when the 2-byte data is "0" (specifically, the data stored in "F02A (H)" (lower digit) Is stored in the L register, the data stored in the "F02B (H)" (upper digit) is stored in the H register, and the HL register value is "0" (zero flag = "1"), game standby It is determined that the display start time has passed.

On the other hand, when setting "69 DD (H)" obtained by adding "FF (H)" to "68 DE (H)" as the game standby display start time, set "DD (H)" to "F02 A (H)". (Lower digit), and stores "69 (H)" in "F02B (H)" (upper digit).
And, when updating the game standby display start time, every interruption (every time the timer measurement process is executed), it consists of "F02A (H)" (lower digit) and "F02B (H)" (upper digit) Subtract 1 from 2-byte data.
In addition, when it is determined whether the game standby display start time has passed, when the 1-byte data of the upper digit is "0" (specifically, the data stored in "F02B (H)" (upper digit) Is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the game standby display start time has elapsed.

As described above, when “FF (H)” is added, it can be determined that the timer value has become “0” simply by determining whether the upper byte (upper digit) has become “0”. Will be described below. In the following description, a decimal number will be taken as an example to facilitate understanding.
For example, in the case where the timer value is "1956" and the above "FF (H)" is not added, the "1956" is stored in the RWM 53. Here, since the lower digit is "56" and the upper digit is "19", they are stored in the storage area of RWM.
Then, when determining whether or not "1956" has elapsed, it is necessary to determine whether both the storage area of the upper digit and the storage area of the lower digit in the storage area of the RWM have become "0". There is.

On the other hand, when the timer value is "1956", in the method of adding "FF (H)" described above, "2055" obtained by adding "99" to "1956" is stored in RWM 53. .
In this case, "55" is stored as the lower digit and "20" is stored as the upper digit.
With this setting, when determining whether "1956" has elapsed, it is possible to determine whether "1956" has elapsed only by determining whether the upper digit has become "0".
Specifically, after "2055" is stored, if "1" is decremented one by one,
2055 → 2054 → ... → 0101 → 0100 → 0099 → ... → 0000
It becomes. Then, when the timer value becomes “0099”, it can be determined that “1856” has elapsed.

As described above, when thinking with decimal numbers, "99" which is the maximum value of lower digits is added, but with hexadecimal numbers, "FF (H)" which is the maximum value that can be stored in a 1-byte storage area to add.
Then, when the timer value becomes “00FF (H)” (upper digit is “0”), it can be determined that the timer value before adding “FF (H)” becomes “0”. .

Regarding the above, for example, when the minimum game time (1837 interrupts) is taken as an example,
072C (H) → 072B (H) → ... 0700 (H) → 06FF (H) → ... 0100 (H) → 00FF (H) → ... 0001 (H) → 0000 (H )
It becomes.
Here, the number of interrupts from “072C (H)” to “0000 (H)” is “1837”.
On the other hand, in "082B (H)" where "FF (H)" is added to "072C (H)",
082B (H) → 082A (H) → ... 0800 (H) → 07FF (H) → ... → 0100 (H) → 00FF (H) → ... 0000 (H)
It becomes.
Here, the number of interrupts from “082B (H)” to “00FF (H)” is “1837”. That is, when the upper digit changes from "08 (H)" to "00 (H)", the minimum game time will elapse.
Thus, although "1" is subtracted from the lower digit every one interrupt, the minimum game time is determined only by determining whether the upper digit has become "0" regardless of the value of the lower digit. It can be determined whether or not it has elapsed.

In addition, when the timer value which added "FF (H)" is set, when the said timer value becomes "00FF (H)", it is judged that predetermined time passed, but also after that, it is low order. The byte timer value is decremented by one for each interrupt. Therefore, if the timer value is not reset, the timer value eventually becomes "0000 (H)". Furthermore, even after becoming “0000 (H)”, “1” is decremented (updated) for each interrupt, and “0000 (H)” is maintained.
Here, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (when "00FF (H)" is reached), it is also conceivable to execute processing to set the lower byte to "0".
However, regardless of the timer value, if the process of subtracting “1” for each interrupt is continued, it is not necessary to determine whether the predetermined time has elapsed, so the process is simplified (program capacity To reduce the

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the passage sensor check (PAHTSEN_CHK) in step S612 in FIG.
First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the passage sensor has risen. In this process, when the D0 bit of the input port 1 rising data is “1” in FIG. 22, it is determined that the passage sensor is rising. If it is determined that the passage sensor has risen, the process proceeds to step S702. If it is determined that the passage sensor has not risen, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S702, the blocker off monitoring time is set. This processing is processing for setting the timer value "144 (D)" in the address "F026 (H)" in FIG.
Next, at step S703, the blocker on monitoring time is set. This process is a process of setting the timer value "45 (D)" to the address "F027 (H)" in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Here, when the blocker off monitoring time and the blocker on monitoring time are set, “1” is subtracted from the next interrupt processing in step S 605 in FIG. 54, respectively.
For example, in FIG. 41, it is determined in step S132 whether or not the blocker-on monitoring time has elapsed.
Further, whether or not the blocker off time monitoring time has elapsed is determined, for example, in step S211 in FIG.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart of external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL) in step S614 in FIG.
First, in step S731, an external signal output flag is acquired in FIG. The value acquired here is stored in the B register. Among the 8 bits, the bits acquired here are D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3). These D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3) correspond to the output port 4 (FIG. 20).
Further, in this processing, the B register is used as a register storing external signal output data.

Next, proceeding to step S732, it is determined whether the door switch signal is on. In the process here, the address "F00A (H)" of the input port 1 level data is stored in the HL register in FIG. Next, the data of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. Then, the A register value and “00000010” are AND-operated, and when the operation result is not “0” (zero flag ≠ “1”), it is judged as “Yes”.
If it is determined that the door switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S733. If it is determined that the door switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S734.
At step S733, the external signal 5 output data is set. This process adds "1" to the B register value. Here, although the D0 bit of the B register value up to that point is "0", the D0 bit of the B register is made "1" by this processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S734. The D0 bit corresponds to the D0 bit of the output port 4 in FIG. The present invention is not limited to the method of adding "1" to the B register value, as long as it is an operation that the D0 bit of the B register becomes "1".

In step S734, it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on. This process determines whether the D3 bit is "1" in the data (input port 1 level data; FIG. 22) of the address "F00A (H)" indicated by the HL register value. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S 737. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S 735.
In the next step S735, the data of the abnormality input flag in FIG. 24 is stored in the A register. The abnormality input flag is not shown in FIG. 54, but is generated at the time of interrupt processing. Further, in FIG. 31, the value of the external signal 4 output time at the time of power failure recovery at the address "F025 (H)" is ORed with the A register value, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.

Then, in the next step S736, it is determined whether the A register value (the value calculated in step S735) is "0". When the A register value is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that all data is absent, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, if "No" is determined in the step S736, the process proceeds to the step S737 to set the D1 bit of the B register to "1". In other words, the D1 bit of the B register is set to “1” when a recoverable error has occurred or when the power-off recovery time external signal 4 output time has not elapsed. The D1 bit corresponds to the D1 bit of the output port 4 in FIG. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
By the above external signal output data management, the D0 to D4 bits of the B register are set to predetermined values.

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the external signal output (I_COUNTER_OUT) in step S615 of FIG.
First, in step S741, the following process is performed.
(1) In FIG. 30, the address (F094 (H)) of the RWM 53 storing the medal signal data is stored in the DE register.
(2) In FIG. 31, the address "F021 (H)" external signal output time value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the external signal output time has ended. If it is determined that the external signal output time has ended, the process proceeds to step S742. If it is determined that the external signal output time has not ended, the process proceeds to step Sstep S751.

In step S742, the timer value "46 (D)" is set to the external signal output time in FIG. By the above processing, “46 (D)” is set when the external signal output time is “0”, and the setting is not performed when the external signal output time is not “0”.
In the next step S743, the following processing is performed.
(1) In FIG. 27, the address (F 070 (H)) of the RWM 53 storing the medal bet signal output count is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is "0", it is determined that there is no medal bet signal output frequency. If it is determined in step S743 that the medal bet signal output frequency has been detected, the process proceeds to step S744. If it is determined that the medal bet signal output frequency is not detected, the process proceeds to step S746.

In the next step S744, "1" is subtracted from the value (the number of medal bet signal outputs) stored in the address (F070 (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S745, the D6 bit of the C register is set to "1". The D6 bit corresponds to the D6 bit (medal bet signal) of the output port 4 in FIG.

In the next step S746, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address value indicated by the HL register value is set to “+1”. As a result, as shown in FIG. 27, the HL register value becomes an address "F071 (H)" indicating the number of medal payout signal outputs from the address "F070 (H)" indicating the number of medal bet signal outputs.
(2) The value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (the number of medal payout signal outputs) is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is not "0", it is determined that the medal payout signal output frequency is present. If it is determined in step S746 that the medal payout signal output frequency has occurred, the process proceeds to step S747, and if it is determined that the medal payout signal output frequency does not occur, the process proceeds to step S749.

In step S 747, “1” is subtracted from the medal payout output number. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value stored in the address (F071 (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S748, the D7 bit of the C register is set to "1". The D7 bit corresponds to the D7 bit (the medal payout signal) of the output port 4 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to step S749.

In step S749, the output bit is turned on / off. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The value (medal signal data) stored at the address (F094 (H)) indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) XOR the A register value and the C register value, and store the operation result in the A register.
(3) The A register value is stored in the address (F094 (H); medal signal data) indicated by the DE register value.

Here, in the C register value, the D7 bit is always "1" when the number of times of medal payout signal output is not "0". When the medal bet signal output frequency is not "0", the D6 bit is always "1".
On the other hand, in the medal signal data (F094 (H)) which is the A register value, the D7 bit is "1" when the medal payout signal is on, and the D7 bit is "0" when the medal payout signal is off. Similarly, in the medal signal data, the D6 bit is "1" when the medal bet signal is on, and the D6 bit is "0" when the medal bet signal is off.

Therefore, for example, when the medal payout signal is “1” and the medal payout signal output frequency is not “0”,
A register value: 10000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 00000000 (A register value after update)
And the medal payout signal after the update becomes "0".
When the medal payout signal is "0" and the medal payout signal output frequency is not "0",
A register value: 00000000
C register value: 10000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
And the medal payout signal after the update becomes "1".

The same applies to the medal bet signal. For example, when the medal payout signal is “0”, the medal bet signal is “1”, the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, and the medal bet signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 01000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 10000000 (A register value after update)
The medal payout signal after the update is "1", and the medal bet signal is "0".
Similarly, for example, when the medal payout signal is “1”, the medal bet signal is “0”, the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, and the medal bet signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 100000000
C register value: 11000000
After XOR operation: 01000000 (A register value after update)
Thus, the medal payout signal after update is “0”, and the medal bet signal is “1”.

Next, at step S750, output data of a medal bet signal and a medal payout signal are set. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the address (F094 (H); medal signal data) indicated by the DE register value in the A register.
By this processing, when the medal payout signal is on, the D7 bit of the A register becomes "1", and when the medal bet signal is on, the D6 bit of the A register becomes "1".

Next, proceeding to step S751, the B register value and the A register value are ORed with each other, and the operation result is stored in the A register. Here, the B register value is a value stored by the external signal output data management of FIG. 57, and D0 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 5) are defined.
Further, in the A register, a medal bet signal and medal payout signal data are stored according to this flowchart. Therefore, by ORing the B register value and the A register value, the data of the external signals 1 to 5 and the medal bet signal and the medal payout signal data are combined in the A register (1 byte). Further, the A register value is stored in output port 4 in FIG. Thereby, an external signal is transmitted from the output port 4. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing condition device information output (I_CNDINF_OUT) in step S616 of FIG.
In step S761, clear data of the condition device information is set. This process is a process of storing the value stored in the condition device output time of the address "F024 (H)" in FIG. 31 in the A register.
As described above, when it is determined in step S311 that the minimum game time (about 4.1 seconds) has elapsed in FIG. 50, the value of “25 (D)” is set in the condition device output time in step S316. It is memorized. Then, this value is decremented by one at each interruption (specifically, at the time of timer measurement in step S 605 in FIG. 54). Therefore, after the value of “25 (D)” is stored, it becomes “0” after “25” interrupt.

  In the next step S762, it is determined whether it is time to output the conditional device information. This processing determines whether the value stored in the A register is “0” (zero flag = “1”), and in the case of “0”, determines that the condition device information is not output, “0”. If not, it is determined that the condition device information is output. If it is determined that the condition device information is output, the process proceeds to step S763, and if it is determined that the condition device information is not output, the process proceeds to step S767.

  In step S763, the address of the RWM 53 of the item condition device information is set. Specifically, the address "F092 (H)" of the character article condition device information in FIG. 29 is stored in the HL register. As a result, the H register value = "F0 (H)" and the L register value = "92 (H)". In the next step S764, it is determined whether or not the item condition device information output is in progress. This process performs an operation of subtracting “12.5 (25/2)” from the value stored in the A register (the condition device output time is stored in the A register in step S 761), If it is determined that the operation result is larger than "0" (carry flag ≠ "1"), it is determined as "Yes". That is, it is determined whether half of the time has elapsed from the initial value “24” of the condition device output time. If it is determined that the combination condition condition apparatus information is output, the process proceeds to step S766. If it is determined that the combination condition condition apparatus information is not output, the process proceeds to step S765.

  In step S765, the RWM 53 address of the winning and replay condition device information is set. In this process, "1" is subtracted from the HL register value in order to store the address of the winning and replay condition device information in FIG. 29, that is, "F091 (H)" in the HL register. As a result, the HL register value = “F091 (H)” (H register value = “F0 (H)”, and the L register value = “91 (H)”).

Next, proceeding to step S766, the conditional device information is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value (subject condition apparatus information or winning and replay condition apparatus information) in the A register. Therefore, when the HL register value = “F091 (H)”, the values of the winning and replay condition device information are stored, and when the HL register value = “F092 (H)”, the item condition device information The value is stored.
Next, proceeding to step S767, the information stored in the A register is output to the output port 7 in FIG. As a result, the conditional device information can be output (sent) to the tester from the output port 7 (in the market slot machine 10, although output processing is executed, it is not actually output). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

  In the conditional device information output process described above, when the timer value of the conditional device output time is “0” in step S762, “No” is determined, and the process proceeds to step S767. In this case, since the A register value is “0”, “0” (00000000 (B)) is output as the conditional device information.

In addition, when the value of the condition device output time is not “0” (when “1” to “24”), the condition device information is output for each interrupt processing.
Although “25 (D)” is set in step S316 of FIG. 50 as the initial value of the condition device output time, “1” is subtracted in step S605 during the interrupt processing of FIG. 54 before step S616. Proceed to condition device information output processing of Therefore, after "25" is set in step S316 in FIG. 50, the condition device output time value is "24" when the process first proceeds to step S762 in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the case of outputting the conditional device information, when the conditional device output time is “13” to “24” (first period) in the determination of step S764, step S765 is not performed, so the condition to be output is The device information is the item condition device information. On the other hand, when the condition device output time is “1” to “12” (second period) in the determination of step S764, the process of step S765 is executed, so the condition device information to be output is a winning And it becomes replay information device information.

FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an output example of the conditional device information in step S767 of FIG.
In the example of FIG. 60, winning and replay condition device number "23" (small winning combination C1) is won in the "N" game in the inside of 1BBA, and in the next "N + 1" game, the prize and replay condition device The example of an output of condition apparatus information when winning a number "1" (Replay A) is shown. In addition, 1BBA shall not be won in the "N" game.
First, when inside the 1BBA, the D0 bit of the character article condition device information becomes “1”. Therefore, the item condition device information is "10000001 (B)".
Also, when the condition device number "23" is won in the "N" game, since the D0 to D5 bits of the winning and replay condition device information are "010111" (= "23 (D)") The replay condition device information is “01010111 (B)”.

  Then, in the "N" game, while the condition device output time value is "24 (D)" to "13 (D)", "Yes" is made in step S764 in FIG. 59, and the role set in step S763 Output item condition device information. Next, while the condition device output time value is "12 (D)" to "1 (D)", "No" is obtained in step S764 in FIG. 59, and the winning and replay condition device information set in step S765 is displayed. Output. Furthermore, when the condition device output time value becomes "0", the condition becomes "No" in step S762 in FIG. 59, so the condition device information ("00000000 (B)") cleared in step S761 is output.

  Next, when the lottery for the winning combination is performed in the “N + 1” game, and the winning and replay condition device number “1” is won, the condition device output time value is “24 (D)” to “13 (D)” While it is “N”, as in the “N” game, “10000001 (B)” is output, and while the condition device output time value is “12 (D)” to “1 (D)”, “01000001 (B) ”is output. Thereby, the signal waveform shown in FIG. 60 is obtained.

Second Embodiment
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an address arrangement of timer values according to the second embodiment, which corresponds to FIG. 31 of the first embodiment.
The second embodiment of FIG. 61 exemplifies three types of A to C.
In the second embodiment A, the arrangement of addresses and the content of each address are the same as in the first embodiment (FIG. 31). However, the reference address is different from that of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the reference address is set to “F021 (H)”, but in the second embodiment A, the reference address is “F02C (H)”.

In the first embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of timer measurement of FIG. 55, the timer value of “F02C (H)” is set to “1” starting from the reference address “F021 (H)” (first) and finally I subtracted it.
On the other hand, in the second embodiment A, starting from the reference address "F02C (H)" (first), the timer value of "F021 (H)" is finally decremented by "1".

Further, in FIG. 61, in the second embodiment B, addresses are assigned in order from the 2-byte timer. Therefore, the addresses “F028 (H)” to “F02D (H)” in the first embodiment are the addresses “F021 (H)” to “F026 (H)” in the second embodiment B.
For example, the addresses "F021 (H)" and "F022 (H)" are the addresses of the medal payout device control time. Furthermore, this address is a reference address. Also, the address of the 1-byte timer is located after the 2-byte timer, and is from "F027 (H)" to "F02D (H)".
Furthermore, in FIG. 61, in the second embodiment C, the arrangement and contents of the addresses are the same as those of the second embodiment B, but the second embodiment is different in that the reference address is “F02D (H)”. It differs from the embodiment B.

FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing timer measurement (example 1) based on the address arrangement and the reference address of the second embodiment A in FIG.
First, in step S771, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing "F02E (H)" in the HL register. As shown in FIG. 61, the address range of the timer value is “F021 (H)” to “F02D (H)”. Therefore, "F02E (H)" is not the address range of the timer value. However, in step S771, the value obtained by adding "2" to "F02C (H)", which is the lower digit address of the reference address, is stored in the HL register.
In step S772, the 2-byte timer number is set. Since the 2-byte timer number is “3” as in the first embodiment, “3” is stored in the B register.

In the next step S773, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register. In other words, it is a process of subtracting "2" from the value stored in the HL register.
By this processing, "F02E (H)" is initially stored in the HL register, but "F02C (H)" (the address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register in step S773.
Further, when "F02C (H)" is stored in the HL register before the process of step S773, "F02A (H)" (address of game standby display start time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S773. Is stored.
Furthermore, when “F02A (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S773, “F028 (H)” (address of medal payout device control time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S773. Is stored.

In the next step S774, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts "1" from a 2-byte value consisting of the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the value stored in the address obtained by adding "1" to the address indicated by the HL register value. Execute the process to This process is the same as step S637 of FIG. In the second embodiment, "2-byte timer value update" is all the same as this process.
Next, proceeding to step S775, it is determined whether measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed, the process proceeds to step S776. If it is determined that the measurement is not completed, the process returns to step S773.

In step S776, the number of one-byte timers is set. This process stores "7" which is a 1-byte timer in the B register and corresponds to the number of timer values to be updated.
In the next step S777, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
Here, when the process proceeds from step S775 to step S776, the HL register value is “F028 (H)”. Therefore, the HL register value becomes "F027 (H)" by subtracting "1" from the HL register value, and the address of the blocker-on monitoring time is stored.

Next, proceeding to step S778, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process is the same as step S633 in FIG. In the second embodiment, "one-byte timer value update" is all the same as this process.
Then, in the next step S779, it is determined whether or not the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S777.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing timer measurement (example 2) based on the address arrangement and the reference address of the second embodiment A.
First, in step S791, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing "F02C (H)" in the HL register.
This process is different from Example 1 of the second embodiment A, and stores the reference address (lower digit address) value of the 2-byte timer in the HL register.
In the next step S792, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing "3" in the B register.
In the next step S793, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts “1” from a 2-byte value consisting of the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the value stored in the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is a process. In other words, it is a process of subtracting "2" from the value stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S794, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register and further subtracting “1” from the value stored in the HL register.
By this processing, "F02C (H)" is initially stored in the HL register, but "F02A (H)" (the address of the game standby display start time) is stored in the HL register in step S794. .
Further, when "F02A (H)" is stored in the HL register before the process of step S794, "F028 (H)" (address of medal payout device control time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S794. Is stored.
Furthermore, when "F028 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the process of step S794, "F026 (H)" (address of blocker off monitoring time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S794. Is stored.

In the next step S795, it is determined whether or not measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended, the process proceeds to step S796. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S793.
In step S796, address correction is performed. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.
Here, when the process proceeds from step S795 to step S796, as described above, the HL register value is “F026 (H)”. On the other hand, the address at which the 1-byte timer value is first subtracted is the blocker on monitoring time of the address "F027 (H)", as shown in FIG. Therefore, "1" is added to the HL register value so that the address at which the 1-byte timer value is first subtracted is obtained.

In the next step S 797, the number of one-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing "7" in the B register.
In step S798, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
In the next step S799, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
Then, the process proceeds to step S800, and it is determined whether the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S798.

  Incidentally, comparing Example 1 (FIG. 62) and Example 2 (FIG. 63) of the second embodiment A, in Example 1 (FIG. 62), the process of step S796 (address correction) of Example 2 (FIG. 63) Since it is not necessary, the program capacity can be reduced by that amount. In other words, from the viewpoint of program capacity reduction, it is preferable to store (set) an address other than the original timer value address in step S771 as in the example 1 (FIG. 62).

FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing timer measurement at the time of address arrangement and reference address in the second embodiment B in FIG.
First, in step S811, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing the reference address value "F021 (H)" (the address of the medal payout device control time) in the HL register.
In the next step S812, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing "3" corresponding to the number of 2-byte timers in the B register.
In step S813, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts “1” from a 2-byte value consisting of data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and data stored in the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. It is a process.

Then, in step S814, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register and further adding “1” to the value stored in the HL register. In other words, it is a process of adding "2" to the value stored in the HL register.
By this process, "F021 (H)" is initially stored in the HL register, but "F023 (H)" (the address of the game standby display start time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S814. It is memorized.
When "F023 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the process of step S814, "F025 (H)" (the address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S814. Be done.
Furthermore, when "F025 (H)" is stored in the HL register before the process of step S814, "F027 (H)" (address of external signal output time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S814. Is stored.

In the next step S815, it is determined whether the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed, the process proceeds to step S816, and if it is determined that the measurement is not completed, the process returns to step S813.

In step S816, the number of one-byte timers is set. This process stores "7" which is a 1-byte timer in the B register and corresponds to the number of timer values to be updated.
In the next step S817, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. Here, when the process proceeds from step S 815 to step S 816, the HL register value is “F 027 (H)” (address of external signal output time), and the tie value to be updated first in the 1-byte timer The address of
Then, in the next step S 818, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S819, it is determined whether measurement of the 1-byte timer has been completed. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the measurement has not been completed, the process returns to step S817.

FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing timer arrangement (example 1) at the time of address arrangement and reference address of the second embodiment C in FIG.
First, in step S831, the measurement start timer address is set. Here, the measurement start timer address stores “F02E (H)” in the HL register, as in Example 1 of the second embodiment A. This address is an address obtained by adding “1” to the address of the blocker on monitoring time storing the last timer of the 1-byte timer.

  Next, at step S832, the number of one-byte timers is set. Here, "7" is set in the B register.

In the next step S833, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. By this processing, for example, when "F02E (H)" is stored in the HL register, "F02D (H)" (address of monitoring time at blocker on) is stored in the HL register.
When "F02D (H)" is stored in the HL register before the process of step S833, "F02C (H)" (address of blocker off monitoring time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S833. It is memorized.

Furthermore, when “F028 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S833, “F027 (H)” (address of external signal output time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S833. Is stored.
Next, proceeding to step S834, the 1-byte timer value is updated. The process here subtracts “1” from the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S835, it is determined whether one-byte timer measurement has ended. This process subtracts "1" from the B register value. Then, when the B register value after subtraction is not "0", it is determined that the one-byte timer measurement has not ended.
If it is determined that the one-byte timer measurement has been completed, the process proceeds to step S836, and if it is determined that the one-byte timer measurement is not completed, the process proceeds to step S833.

In step S836, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing the number "3" of 2-byte timers in the B register.
In the next step S837, the next timer address is set. This process executes a process of subtracting the HL register value by “1” and further subtracting the HL register value by “1”. In other words, it is a process of subtracting "2" from the value stored in the HL register.
Thus, since the HL register value at the time of proceeding to step S837 is "F027 (H)", the HL register value becomes "F025 (H)" by the process of step S837.
Next, at step S838, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from a 2-byte value with the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register value as the lower digit and the address value indicated by “HL register value + 1” as the upper digit.

  In the next step S839, it is determined whether the 2-byte timer measurement has ended. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register, and when the B register value after subtraction is not “0”, it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not ended. If it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has not ended, the process returns to step S837. If it is determined that the 2-byte timer measurement has ended, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing timer arrangement (example 2) at the time of address arrangement and reference address in the second embodiment C in FIG.
First, in step S851, the measurement start timer address is set. This process is a process of storing "F02D (H)" which is a reference address in the HL register.
Next, at step S852, the number of one-byte timers is set. This process is a process of storing "7" which is the number of 1-byte timers in the B register.

In the next step S853, the 1-byte timer value is updated. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
Then, in step S854, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. By this processing, when “F02D (H)” is stored in the HL register, “F02C (H)” (address of blocker off monitoring time) is stored in the HL register.
In addition, when “F027 (H)” is stored in the HL register before the process of step S854, “F026 (H)” (upper address of the minimum game time) is stored in the HL register by the process of step S854. It is memorized.

Next, proceeding to step S855, it is determined whether measurement of the 1-byte timer has been completed. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer has ended.
If it is determined that the measurement of the 1-byte timer is completed, the process proceeds to step S 856. If it is determined that the measurement is not completed, the process returns to step S 853.

In step S856, address correction is performed. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. Here, when the process proceeds from step S 855 to step S 856, the HL register value is “F 026 (H)”. This address value is not "F025 (H)" which is the first address (lower digit) at which subtraction of the 1-byte timer value is started. Therefore, “1” is subtracted from the HL register value, and the HL register value is corrected to be the first address (lower digit) at which subtraction of the 1-byte timer value is started.
In step S857, the 2-byte timer number is set. This process is a process of storing "3" which is the number of 2-byte timers in the B register.
In the next step S858, the next timer address is set. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the HL register value and further subtracting “1” from the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S859, the 2-byte timer value is updated. This process subtracts “1” from the 2-byte value consisting of data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and data stored in the address obtained by adding “1” to the address indicated by the HL register value. Processing.
Next, proceeding to step S860, it is determined whether measurement of the 2-byte timer has been completed. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, and when the B register value after subtraction is “0”, it is determined that the measurement of the 2-byte timer has ended.
When it is determined that the measurement by the 2-byte timer is ended, the processing according to the flowchart is ended. When it is determined that the measurement is not ended, the process returns to step S858.

  Incidentally, comparing example 1 (FIG. 65) and example 2 (FIG. 66) of the second embodiment C, in example 1 (FIG. 65), the process of step S 856 (address correction) of example 2 (FIG. 66) Since it is not necessary, the program capacity can be reduced by that amount. In other words, from the viewpoint of program capacity reduction, it is preferable to store (set) an address other than the address of the original timer value in step S 831 as in the example 1 (FIG. 65).

As mentioned above, although embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the content mentioned above, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) The types of timers according to the present embodiment are not limited to those shown in FIG. 31, and the game machine is provided with various other timers. The timers shown in FIG. 31 are illustrative and not meant to be limiting.
For example, in FIG. 43, when the maintenance medal check in step S182 is performed, control is performed as follows.
When the rising signal of the insertion sensor 1 is detected, a timer value called the insertion sensor 1 passage check time is set, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Then, if the insertion sensor 1 continues to detect the medal even if the timer value of the insertion sensor 1 passage check time becomes “0”, a medal retention error (CE error) is made.
Similarly, when the rising signal of the insertion sensor 2 is detected, a timer value called the insertion sensor 2 passage check time is set, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt processing. Then, if the insertion sensor 2 continues to detect the medal even if the timer value of the insertion sensor 2 passage check time becomes “0”, a medal retention error (CE error) is made.

In the example of FIG. 31, although the number of 1-byte timers is seven and the number of 2-byte timers is three, the rule described in FIG. 31 is used regardless of the number of 1-byte timers and 2-byte timers. You may arrange the address according to.
Here, when the number of 1-byte timers is “N1” and the number of 2-byte timers is “N2”, any of “N1> N2”, “N1 = N2”, and “N1 <N2” may be used. .
Also, when “N112”, “N2 = 0” may be adopted. Similarly, when “N2 ≧ 2”, “N1 = 0” may be used.
Furthermore, “N1 ≧ 1 and N2 ≧ 1” may be satisfied.

(2) In the present embodiment, the timer value is decremented by “1” for each interrupt, but it is also possible to update the timer value at another predetermined cycle. Also, the timer value may be decremented by “1” in multiple interruptions. For example, the timer measurement process may be executed at a rate of once every five interrupts. Furthermore, the subtraction value of the timer value is not limited to "1". Furthermore, for example, timer measurement processing may be executed at a rate of once every five interrupts, and the timer value may be decremented by "2."
(3) In the present embodiment, when the timer value before update is “0”, the timer value is also “0” after update. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is determined whether the timer value is "0" before the update, and it is determined that the timer value before the update is "0", the timer value is not updated It is also possible to exclude programs. However, as in the present embodiment, if the timer value before updating is “0” (without determining whether it is “0”), the program can be updated uniformly. It can be simplified (reduce the program capacity).
(4) Each timer value shown in FIG. 31 is an example, and is not limited to the value shown in FIG. For example, the 1-byte timer value shown in FIG. 31 may be a 2-byte timer value depending on the specifications of slot machine 10, and the 2-byte timer value shown in FIG. It may be a timer value.

  (5) In the present embodiment, examples of the 1-byte timer and the 2-byte timer are given, but it is also possible to provide a 3-byte timer. Assuming that the initial value of the 2-byte timer is "FFFF (H)" and it is possible to count about 146 seconds when "1" is decremented in the interrupt process every "2.235 ms". Therefore, for example, when counting 3 minutes, a 3-byte timer is required. When a 3-byte timer is provided, a process of adding "3" to the HL register value may be performed when setting the next address of the 3-byte timer.

(6) In the present embodiment, the cycle of interrupt processing is set to “2.235 ms”, but the present invention is not limited to this value, and various settings such as 1 ms and 3.5 ms can be made.
Further, the timings of setting various timer values shown in FIG. 31 are not limited to those exemplified in the above embodiment, and any timing may be used as long as it is an appropriate timing.
(7) The address of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 21 to 31 and the contents corresponding to the address are an example, and can be set as appropriate.

<Supplementary Note>
The inventions described in the initial specification and the like of the present application (initial inventions) may include, for example, the following first to eighth inventions, and each solves the problems to be solved by the respective initial inventions and the problems related to the initial inventions. Means of the invention and effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification is not meant to be limited to the first to eighth inventions.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 1 In the conventional gaming machine, for example, when there are a plurality of measurement targets (when updating a plurality of timer values), the program may be complicated and the program capacity may increase. is there.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to update each count value with a simple program in the case where there are a plurality of count values for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 1 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
(B1) A first solution means corresponding to the first embodiment (FIG. 55) is
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage areas for storing 1-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (seven numbers of “F021 (H)” to “F027 (H)” in FIG. 31) )When,
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 55) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
The count value updating means
A process (step S631) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) in the first register (HL register), and a predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) as the second register (B register) And (step S632) to store in
a) A process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S633)
b) updating the value of the first register (step S634);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S635) is repeatedly executed until the value of the second register becomes a specific value (“0”), thereby making it possible to update the count value of the storage area. It is characterized by

(B2) A first solution corresponding to the second embodiment C (example 2) (FIG. 66) is
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage area for storing a 1-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (“F027 (H)” to “F02D (in the second embodiment C of FIG. H) "7)",
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 66) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
The count value updating means
A process (step S851) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F02D (H)) in the first register (HL register), and a predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) as the second register (B register) And the process (step S852) to be stored in
a) A process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S853),
b) updating the value of the first register (step S854);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S855) is repeated until the value of the second register becomes a specific value (“0”), thereby making it possible to update the count value of the storage area. It is characterized by

(B3) The second solution (second embodiment C (example 1) shown in FIG. 65) is
A plurality of types of 1-byte storage area for storing a 1-byte count value for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (“F027 (H)” to “F02D (in the second embodiment B of FIG. H) "7)",
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 65) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
The count value updating means
The process (step S831) of storing the value specifying the predetermined address (F02E (H)) in the first register (HL register) (step S831) and the predetermined value ("7" which is the number of timers) the second register (B register) And (step S832) to store in
a) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S833);
b) a process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S834);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S 835) is repeated until the value of the second register becomes a specific value, thereby making it possible to update the count value of the storage area. .

(B4) The third solution corresponding to the second embodiment A (example 2) (FIG. 63) is
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (“F028 (H)” to “F02D (in the second embodiment A of FIG. 61) H) "3)",
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 63) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
The count value updating means
A process (step S791) of storing a value for specifying a predetermined address (F02C (H)) in the first register (HL register) and a predetermined value (“3” which is the number of timers) for the second register (B register) And (step S792) to store in
a) A process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S793)
b) updating the value of the first register (step S794);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S795) is repeated until the value of the second register becomes a specific value, thereby making it possible to update the count value of the storage area. .

(B5) The third solution corresponding to the second embodiment B (FIG. 64) is
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (“F021 (H)” to “F026 (in the second embodiment B of FIG. H) "3)",
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 64) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
The count value updating means
A process (step S811) of storing a value specifying a predetermined address (F021 (H)) in the first register (HL register), and a predetermined value (“3” which is the number of timers) as the second register (B register) And (step S812) to store in
a) A process of subtracting “1” from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S813)
b) updating the value of the first register (step S814);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S815) is repeated until the value of the second register becomes a specific value, thereby making it possible to update the count value of the storage area. .

(B6) The fourth solution (the second embodiment A (example 1) shown in FIG. 62) is
A plurality of types of 2-byte storage areas for storing 2-byte count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (“F028 (H)” to “F02D (in the second embodiment A of FIG. 61) H) "3)",
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 62) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
The count value updating means
A process of storing the value specifying the predetermined address (F02E (H)) in the first register (step S771) and a process of storing the predetermined value ("3" which is the number of timers) in the second register (B register) (Step S772) and
a) a process of updating the value of the first register (step S773);
b) a process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area based on the value of the first register (step S774);
c) The process of updating the value of the second register (step S775) is repeated until the value of the second register becomes a specific value, thereby making it possible to update the count value of the storage area. .
(C) Effects of the First Invention 1 According to the first invention, it is possible to continue updating a plurality of types of storage areas simply by executing the update process of the first register and the second register and the subtraction process of the count value. It becomes.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 1 The same as the first invention.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 2 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S742 in FIG. 58), a count value for storing whether or not a first time (external signal output time) has elapsed is stored. 1 storage area (F021 (H)),
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S 326 in FIG. 51), the count value for determining whether the second time (reel stop acceptance standby time) has elapsed is stored. And a second storage area (F022 (H)),
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), update processing (step S633 in FIG. 55) is performed to update the count values stored in at least the first storage area and the second storage area. Run
In the update process,
When the count value before update is “N (N ≧ 1)”, the count value is updated to “N−1” by subtraction.
When the count value before updating is "0", the count value is kept as "0".

(C) Effects of the First Invention 2 According to the first invention, it is possible to uniformly execute the process of updating the count value without performing the process of determining whether the count value before update is “0”. The program of count value update processing can be simplified.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 3 The same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 3 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S742 in FIG. 58), a count value for storing whether or not a first time (external signal output time) has elapsed is stored. 1 storage area (F021 (H)),
When the second condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S 326 in FIG. 51), the count value for determining whether the second time (reel stop acceptance standby time) has elapsed is stored. And a second storage area (F022 (H)),
Sequentially arranging the address of the first storage area and the address of the second storage area;
When it is time to update the count value
a) A value (F021 (H)) for specifying the address value of the first storage area is stored in the register (HL register) (step S631 in FIG. 55),
b) Subtract “1” from the count value of the first storage area based on the value of the register (step S633).
c) The address of the second storage area is specified by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to or from the value of the register (in the first embodiment, however, for example, subtracting in the second embodiment C). Update to the value you want (step S634),
d) Subtract "1" from the count value of the second storage area based on the value of the register (step S633)
Thus, the count values of the first storage area and the second storage area can be updated whenever it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54).

(C) Effects of the First Invention 3 According to the first invention, it is possible to continue updating a plurality of types of storage areas simply by executing register update processing and count value subtraction processing.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 4 The same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 4 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (first embodiment; FIGS. 31 and 55) is
A plurality of storage areas (F021 (H) to F02D (H)) storing count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 55) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
Storage area is
M (M.gtoreq.1) (seven) storage areas X (F.sub.021 (H) to F.sub.027 (H)) capable of storing a count value consisting of one byte;
N (N.gtoreq.1) (three) storage areas Y (F.sub.028 (H) to F.sub.02 D (H)) which are continuously arranged in M storage areas X and can store a 2-byte count value Have
The count value updating means
A value specifying the predetermined address (F021 (H)) is stored in a register (HL register) (step S631),
1 byte timer subtraction process (step S633) including at least a process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area X based on the value of the register (step S633) and a process of updating the value of the register (step S634) Perform ~ S635),
After completion of the one-byte timer subtraction process, a two-byte timer subtraction process (steps S637 to S639) including at least a process (step S637) of subtracting the count value of the storage area Y by one based on the value of the register. To perform.

The second solution (for example, the second embodiment A, FIG. 61, FIG. 62)
A plurality of storage areas (F021 (H) to F02D (H)) storing count values for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.
A count value update unit (timer measurement (I_TIME_CNT) in FIG. 62) capable of updating the count value of each storage area at a predetermined cycle (interrupt cycle every 2.235 ms);
Storage area is
M (M ≧ 1) (3) storage areas X (F 028 (H) to F 02 D (H)) capable of storing a 2-byte count value;
N (N.gtoreq.1) (seven) storage areas Y (F.sub.021 (H) to F.sub.027 (H)) which are continuously arranged in M storage areas X and can store count values consisting of 1 byte Have
The count value updating means
A value specifying a predetermined address is stored in a register (step S771),
A 2-byte timer subtraction process (step S773) including at least a process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area X based on the value of the register (step S774) and a process of updating the value of the register (step S773). Execute ~ S775),
After completion of the 2-byte timer subtraction process, 1-byte timer subtraction process (steps S777 to S779) including at least a process of subtracting "1" from the count value of the storage area Y based on the value of the register To perform.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 4 According to the first invention, the count values of a plurality of storage areas having a storage area of 1 byte and a storage area of 2 bytes can be updated by a simple method.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 5 In the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined whether the count value consisting of 2 bytes (upper 1 byte, lower 1 byte) is “0”, the upper byte There is a problem that it is necessary to determine both the value of the lower byte and the value of the lower byte, which requires program processing.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the beginning is that, when updating the count value of the 2-byte storage area, whether the original count value of the 2-byte storage area is “0” or not, the upper byte and the lower byte It is to be feasible without judging both values of.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 5 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the process proceeds to step S255 in FIG. 46), a 2-byte count value (0B7D (to determine whether the predetermined time (the medal payout device control time) has elapsed) has elapsed. H) provided with a 2 byte storage area (F028 (H) and F029 (H)) for storing
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value of the storage area is decremented by “1” (step S637 in FIG. 55).
Of the 2-byte count value, when the value of the upper byte becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed.
According to a second solution, in the first solution,
Assuming that it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed when the initial value “x (H)” (0A7E (H)) becomes “0” as the count value, the value of the upper byte is “0”. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, an initial value “x + y (H)” (y = FF (H), x + y = 0B7D (H)) determined that the predetermined time has elapsed when It is characterized by storing in the area.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 5 According to the first invention, when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed, it is sufficient to only determine whether or not the value of the upper byte is “0”. Because there is no need to read and determine byte values), program capacity can be reduced and processing speed can be increased.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 6 The same as the first invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 6 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
Under the condition that a predetermined time (minimum gaming time; 1837 interruption) has elapsed from a predetermined time (step S312 in FIG. 50), it is possible to proceed with the game (in FIG. 50, it is possible to advance to the processing after step S312).
A 2-byte storage area (F02C (H) and F02D (H)) for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed,
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value of the storage area is decremented by “1” (step S637 in FIG. 55).
It is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S311 of FIG. 50) on condition that the value of the upper byte is "0" among the 2-byte count value ("Yes" in step S311 in FIG. 50), and the game can be made progressable. It is characterized by
In the embodiment, “082B (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to the timer value “072C (H)” corresponding to the minimum game time (1837 interrupt) is stored in a 2-byte storage area (F02C (H) H) and F02D (H)).
(C) Effects of the First Invention 6 The same as the First Invention 5

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 7 The same as the first invention 5.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 7 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
A gaming medium payout device (medal payout device) having a drive unit (hopper motor 36) for paying out gaming media (medals);
When the operation of the drive unit is started (step S256 in FIG. 46), the drive unit is operated until a predetermined time (the medal payout device control time; 2687 interruptions) elapses,
A 2-byte storage area (F028 (H) and F029 (H)) for storing a 2-byte count value for determining whether or not the predetermined time has elapsed,
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value of the storage area is decremented by “1” (step S637 in FIG. 55).
Of the 2-byte count value, when the value of the upper byte becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S257), and the operation of the drive unit is stopped (step S260)
It is characterized by
In the embodiment, “0 B 7 D (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to the timer value “0 A 7 E (H)” corresponding to the medal payout device control time (2687 interrupt) is It stores in F028 (H) and F029 (H).
(C) Effects of the First Invention 7 The same as the First Invention 5

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problems to be solved by the Invention 8 The same as the Invention 5 is.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 8 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
A payout amount display unit (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying the number of game media paid out;
After displaying the number of game media in the payout number display unit, store a 2-byte count value to determine whether or not a predetermined time (game standby display start time; 26847 interrupt) has passed under certain conditions 2 Byte storage area (F02A (H) and F02B (H)),
When it is time to update the count value (step S605 in FIG. 54), the count value of the storage area is decremented by “1” (step S637 in FIG. 55).
Of the 2-byte count value, when the value of the upper byte becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S161 of FIG. 42), and the display of the payout amount display portion It is characterized in that the mode can be switched to a predetermined mode (“00”, “* 0”, or “**” (where “*” indicates non-lighting)).
In the embodiment, “69 DD (H)” obtained by adding “FF (H)” to the timer value “68 DE (H)” corresponding to the game standby display start time (26847 interrupt) is It stores in F02A (H) and F02B (H).
(C) Effects of the First Invention 8 The same as the First Invention 5

Reference Signs List 10 slot machine 11 power switch 12 setting key switch 13 setting switch 14 reset switch 15 door switch 17 display window 21 effect lamp 22 speaker 23 image display device 24 four-way controller 25 menu button 31 reel 32 motor 33 reel sensor 35 hopper 36 hopper motor 37 (37a, 37b) Payout sensor 40a 1 bed switch 40b 3 bed switch 41 start switch 42 stop switch 43 medal insertion port 43a passage sensor 44 (44a, 44b) input sensor 45 blocker 46 settlement switch 50 main control board (main control means)
51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 winning combination lottery means 62 winning flag control means 63 push order instruction number selection means 64 effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 prize determination means 67 payout means 68 RT control means 69 advantage zone control means 70 external signal transmission means 71 control command Transmission means 73 Setting value display LED (digit 5)
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED (digit 1, 2)
78 Acquisition number display LED (digit 3, 4)
79 status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bed display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e input LED
79f Replay Display LED
79g effect display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 input port (input port 0 to 2)
82 output port (output port 0 to 7)
83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External concentrated terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A first storage area for storing a count value for determining whether a first time has elapsed when a first condition is satisfied;
A second storage area for storing a count value for determining whether or not a second time has elapsed when the second condition is satisfied;
Sequentially arranging the address of the first storage area and the address of the second storage area;
When it is time to update the count value
a) storing a value specifying the address value of the first storage area in a register;
b) Subtract “1” from the count value of the first storage area based on the value of the register;
c) updating the value of the register to a value specifying the address of the second storage area by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the value of the register;
d) The count values of the first storage area and the second storage area are incremented each time the count value is updated by subtracting “1” from the count value of the second storage area based on the value of the register. A game machine characterized in that it is updatable.

Images